Chevrolet 1998 Lumina Owner`s manual

Chevrolet 1998 Lumina Owner`s manual
GENUIN
CE
HEVROLET
”
Y
0The 1998 Chevrolet Lumina Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “air bag” system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
3- 1
4- 1
5- 1
6-1
7-1
8-1
9- 1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on 8-10.
page
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
I
GENERAL MOTORS, GM,the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and
the
name LUMINA are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includesthe latest information atthe time it
was printed.We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute
the name
“General Motorsof Canada Limited”for Chevrolet
Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual
in your vehicle,so it will be
there if you ever need
it when you’re on the road.
If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual
in it so the new
owner can use it.
Litho inU.S.A.
Part No. 10285606 B First Edition
ii
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATIONTHROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
c
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propridtaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide enfransais chez
votre concessionaireou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
@Copyright General Motors Corporation 1997
All Rights Reserved
I
I
The dynamic William C. “Billy”
Durant shiftedgears frommaking
carriages to making cars,
forming half the team that gave
I birth to Chevrolet.
Louis Chevrolet, the other half of the team,
at the wheel of his experimental “Classic
Six, ’’ which entered production in I91 2.
That year 2999 vehicles were produced.
iv
I
The 1957 Chevy started a romance with the American
public -- and was poweredby an available fuel-injected V8.
60's automotive excitement ,-,
included Chevrolet landmarks
like
the
Corvette Sting
Ray,
the sporty Camaro, and
4.'
powerplants like the
legendary 327 V8.
. J
r *
I
I
.-
2
Your new Chevrolet continues a tradition of quality and value.
V
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual
from beginning
to end when theyfirst receive their new vehicle.
If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Index
A good place to look
for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical
list of what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll
find it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a numberof safety cautionsin this book.
We use a box and the word
CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were
to ignore
the warning.
These mean thereis something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell
you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do
to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through in
it
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
vi
‘I
I
VehicleDamageWarnings
Also, in thisbookyouwill
NOTICE:
In the notice
area,
we
tell
you
about
something
that
can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage
find thesenotices:wouldnotbecoveredbyyourwarranty,and
it could
be costly. Butthe notice will tell you what
to do to help
avoid the damage.
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE.
vii
Vehicle Symbols
These aresome of the symbolsyou may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
I
I
CAUTION
A
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
These symbols
have todo with
your lamps:
TURN
SIGNALS
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
e e3
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
COOLANT
TEMP
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
1-1
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
FUSE
P
LIGHTER
CAUSTIC
BRAKE
(@)
HORN
BURNS
I
SPEAKER
AVOID
SPARKSOR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BAllERY
viii
POWER
WINDOW
1,11,
LAMPS
FOG LAMPS
.-x0
**'
$0
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
e,
FUEL
(@)
)b.
c>
B
0Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
I
Here you’llfind information aboutthe seats in your Chevrolet and how to use your safety belts properly.
You can also
learn about some things you should
not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-6
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-19
1-20
1-20
1-26
1-27
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’refor Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts-- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag System
Center Passenger Position
Rear Seat Passengers
1-30
1-33
1-35
1-48
1-61
1-64
1-64
1-65
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guidesfor
Children and Small Adults
Children
Built-in Child Restraint (Option)
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-1
I
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you howto adjust the seats and
explains reclining seatbacks and head restraints.
2-Way Manual Front Seat
You can lose controlof the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you,or make you pusha pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when Lift the bar under the front
of the seat to unlock it. Slide
the vehicle is not moving.
the seatto where you wantit and release thebar. Try to
move the seat with your
body to be sure the seat
is
locked into place.
1-2
Driver’s 4-Way Manual Seat (Option)
Lift this handle to tilt the seatorupdown.
The driver’s seat may have
a bar and a handle under the
front edge of the seat.Lift the bar to unlock the seat and
to slide it forward and backward.
1-3
FRONT (A): Raise the frontof the seat by holding the
switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the front
of
the seat.
Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move
the
CENTER (B):Move the seat forwardor backward by
it. Release the lever to
holding the control to the front or to the back. Raise or seatback to where you want
lock
the
seatback
into
place.
Pull up on the lever
lower the seat by holding the control
up or down.
without pushing on the seatback, and the seatback
REAR (C): Raise the rearof the seat by holding the
will move forward.
of
switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the rear
the seat.
1-4
But don’t havea seatback reclinedif your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is
in motioncan be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their
job when
you’re reclined likethis.
The shoulderbelt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against yourbody. Instead, itwill be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lapbelt can’t do its
job either. In a crash the
belt couldgo up over yourabdomen. The belt
forces would be there, notat your pelvic bones.
This could cause seriousinternal injuries.
For proper protectionwhen the vehicle is in
motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down
so that the topof the
restraint is closest to the top
of your ears. This position
reduces the chanceof a neck injuryin a crash.
Safety Belts: They’refor Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tellsyou some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
Don’t let anyone ride where or
he she can’t wear
a safety beltproperly. If you are in acrash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be muchworse. You can hit things
inside the
vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can beseriously
injured orkilled. In the same crash,
you might
not beif you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that yourpassengers’ belts
are fastened properlytoo.
1-6
It is extremely dangerous toride ina cargoarea,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people ridingin these areas are morelikely to be
seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to
ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure
everyone in yourvehicle is in a seat andusing a
safety beltproperly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comeson as a reminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
~
~~~
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work.
You never knowif you’ll be in a crash.If you do have
a crash, you don’t knowif it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t
survive. But most crashesare in between. In manyof
them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as
fast as
it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s
just a seat
on wheels.
1-7
e
_*.
i -
f
Put someone onit.
1-8
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider
doesn't stop.
I
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
or the instrument panel...
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-9
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
@ Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after 816
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. Bat you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being consciousd a g a d afkf an accident, SO
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
e.”If my vehicle has air bage, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down the
as vehicle does.
You get more timeto stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take
the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-10
Air bags are in m y vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts not insteadof them. Everyair bag
system ever offered for sale has regraireidthe use of
safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has ;air
bags, you$til1 have to buckle up to get themost
protection. That’strue not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and ather collisions.
--
&.’ If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, butif you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t yourfault -- you and
your passengerscan be hurt. Being a gooddriver
doesn’t protect youfrom things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number
of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds
of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety beltsare for everyone.
Adults
This partis only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things
to know
about safety belts and children. And there are
different rulesfor smaller children and babies.
If a
child will be riding in your vehicle,
see the part of
this manual called “Children.” Follow those rules
for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to
know which restraint systems
your vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describesthe driver’s restraint system.
1-11
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver hasa lap-shoulder belt. Here’show to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to seehow, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can situp straight.
The shoulder beltmay lock if you pull the belt across
go back
you very quickly. Ifthis happens, let the belt
slightly to unlockit. Then pull the belt across
you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure
it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end
of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
1-12
5 . To make the lap part tight, pull down on
the buckle
end of the beltas you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap partof the belt should be worn low and snug
on
the hips,just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there's a sudden stopor crash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-13
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that
is right for you.
1-14
To move it down, squeezethe release lever and move
the height adjuster to the desired position.
You can move
the adjuster up
just by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to moveit down without squeezing the release
lever
to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that
the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder.The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling
off
your shoulder.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
- I
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder isbelt
too loose. Ina crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulderbelt is too loose. It won’tgive nearly
as much protection this way.
1-15
@
What’s wrong with this?
You can beseriously injured if your beltis
buckled inthe wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forceswould be there, notat the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
I
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
I
d
I
A:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
You can be seriously
injured if you wear the
shoulder beltunder your arm. In a crash, your
body would move toofar forward, which would
increase the chanceof head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force
to the
ribs, which aren’tas strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severelyinjure internal organs
like your liveror spleen.
I
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder atall times.
1-17
You can be seriously iqjured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full.width af the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,,
make it straight so it can work properly, ar ask
your dealer to fix it.
I
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-18
j
I
I
f
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, theyare more likely to be
seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts.
. .
. .
To unlatch the belt, just push the button onthe buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door,
be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door onit, you can damage boththe
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be wornas low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-19
The best way to protect the fetus
is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that thefetus won’t be hurtin a crash. For
pregnant women, asfor anyone, the key to making
safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly.
Here are the most important things
to know about the air
bag system:
Right Front Passenger Position
You can be severely injuredor killed ina crash if
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
properly, see “Driver Position” earlierin this section.
a
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during
The right fiont passenger’s safety belt works the same
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things
way as the driver’s safety belt
-- except for one thing.
inside the vehicleor being ejected fromit. Air bags
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt all
out
are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
the way, youwill engage the child restraint locking
All air bags even reduced-force airbags are
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
designed to work with safety belts,but don’t
way and start again.
replace them.Air bags are designed to work only
in moderate to severe crashes where the front
of
Air Bag System
your vehiclehits something. They aren’t designed
This part explains the air bag system.
or low-speed
to inflateat all in rollover, rear, side
Your vehicle has “Next Generation” reduced-force
frontal crashes. And,for unrestrained occupants,
frontal air bags -- one air bagfor the driver and another
reduced-force air bags may provide less protection
air bagfor the right front passenger.
in frontal crashes thanmore forceful air bags have
provided in the past. Everyonein your vehicle
Reduced-force frontal air bags are designed to help
reduce therisk of injury fromthe force of an inflating
should wear a safety belt properly whether or
air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very
not there’s an air bag for thatperson.
quickly if they are to do their
job and comply with
federal regulations.
--
--
--
--
A CAUTION:
I
CAUTION: (Continued)
system is designedfor them. Young children and
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blinkinfants need the protectionthat a childrestraint
of an eye. If you’re too closeto an inflating air bag,
system can provide. Always secure children
it could seriously injure you. This is true even with
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the
reduced-force frontalair bags. Safety belts help
keep
part of this manual called “Children”
and see the
you in position before and during a crash. Always
caution labels onthe sunvisors and the right front
wear your safety belt, even with reduced-force
passenger’s safety belt,
air bags. The driver should assitfar back as possible
while still maintaining controlof the vehicle.
There is an air bag
readiness light onthe
instrument panel, which
CAUTION:
shows AIR BAG.
AIR BAG
A
Children who are up against., or very close to,an
air bag whenit inflatescan be seriously injured
or killed. This is true even though your vehicle
has reduced-force frontal air bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for
infants.
adults, but notforybungchildrenand
Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its
air bag
CAUTION: (Continued)
The system checksthe air bag electrical system
for
malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-21
How the Air Bag System Works
The rightfront passenger’s air bagis in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-22
In any particular crash,no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because
of the damage
to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
U
I
Inflation is determinedby the angle of the impact and
If somethingis between an occupant and an air how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path What makes an air bag inflate?
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
In an impact of sufficient severity,the air bag sensing
put anything between an occupant and an air
system detects thatthe vehicle is in a crash.
The sensing
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
bag covering.
hardware are all part of the air bag modules insidethe
steering wheel andin the instrument panel in front
of the
When should an air bag inflate?
right front passenger.
How does an air bag restrain?
An air bag is designed toinflate in a moderateto severe
frontal or near-frontal crash.The air bag willinflate
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
only if the impact speedis above the system’s designed
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight
into a
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
wall that doesn’t move
or deform, the threshold level
is
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the forceof
about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,
so that
stopping the occupant more gradually. But
air bags would
it can be somewhat above or below this range.
If your
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily
vehicle strikes something that will move
or deform, such
because an occupant’s motionis not toward those air
as a parked car,the threshold level will be higher.
The
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
air bag is not designed to
inflate in rollovers, side
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
impacts orrear impacts, because inflation would not
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
help the occupant.
f
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates,
it quickly deflates,so
quickly that some people may not even realize the
air bag inflated. Some componentsof the air bag
module -- the steering wheel hub
for the driver’s air
bag, or the instrument panel
for the right front
passenger’s bag -- will be hotfor a short time. The
parts of the bag that comeinto contact with you may be
warm, but nottoo hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming
from vents in the deflatedair
bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent
the driver from
seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does
it stop people from leavingthe vehicle.
F
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
~
1
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe so.
to do
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
In many crashes severe enough
to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from
the right front passenger air bag.
0
Air bags are designedto inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts
for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, theair bag system
won’t be thereto help protect you in another crash.
A new system will includeair bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual
for your
vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.
a Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the air bag system.The module records information
about the readiness of the system, when the sensors
are activated and driver’s safety belt usage at
deployment.
a Let only qualified technicians work
on your air
bag system. Improper service can mean that your
air bag system won’t work properly.
See your
dealer for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering
for the driver’sor the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly.You may haveto replace theair
bag modulein the steeringwheel or both theair
bag moduleand the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag. Do not openor
break theair bag coverings.
If your vehicle ever gets into a oflotwater -- such as
water up tothe carpeting or higher-- or if water enters
your vehicle and soaksthe carpet, the air bag controller
can be soaked and ruined.
If this ever happens, and then
you start your vehicle, the damage could make
the air
bags inflate, evenif there’s nocrash. You would have to
replace the air bags as well as the sensors and related
parts. If your vehicle is ever
in a flood,or if it’s exposed
to water that soaksthe carpet, you can avoid needless
repair costsby turning off the vehicle immediately.
Don’t let anyone start the vehicle, even to tow
it, unless
the battery cables arefirst disconnected.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systemin several places
around your vehicle.You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer andthe Lumina Service Manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and
the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
For up to10 minutes after the ignitionkey is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,an air
bag can still inflate
during improper service.You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid yellowconnectors. Theyare
probably part of the air bag system. Besure to
follow proper service procedures,and make sure
the person performing work
for you is qualified
to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-25
Center Passenger Position
-
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has front
a
split seat and a rear bench
seat, someone can sitin the center positions.
When you sitin a center seating position, you havelap
a
safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull
it along the belt.
1-26
Buckle, position and releaseit the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end
of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would beable to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had
to.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very importantfor rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people
in the rear
seat are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can
be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
To make the belt shorter, pullits free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
1-27
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
U
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how towear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t letit get twisted.
The shoulder beltmay lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into
the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plateto make sureit is secure.
1-28
When the shoulder beltis pulled out allthe way, it
will lock.If it does, letit go back allthe way and
start again. If the belt is not long enough,see “Safety
Belt Extender” atthe end of this section. Make sure
the release button onthe buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the beltas you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap partof the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips,just touching thethighs. In a crash,this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pullthe belt very quicklyout of the retractor.
1-29
A CAUTION:
I
I
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown
child restraints and for small adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away
from the neck and head.
J
There isone guide for each outside passenger position
in
the rear seat.To provide added safety belt comfort
for
children who have outgrown child restraints and
for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and usethe safety belt:
To unlatch the belt,just push the buttonon the buckle.
1-30
1. Pull the elastic cord outfrom between the edge of
the seatback andthe interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.
The elastic
cord must be underthe belt. Then, placethe guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges
of the belt into
the slotsof the guide.
1-31
I
I
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat.
The elastic cord must be under
the belt and the
guide on top.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety beltas
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt
edges togetherso that you can take them out
from the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip,
and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide and
clip inward andin between the seatback and the interior
body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed.
1-32
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled nor theage and size of the traveler
changes the need,for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some
age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
Children who are up against,or very close to, any
air bag whenit inflates can be seriously
injured
or killed. This istrue even though your vehicle
has reduced-forcefrontal air bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protectionfor
adults, but not for young childrenand infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its air
bag system is designed
for them. Young children
and infants need the protectionthat a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your
vehicle.
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whetherit is
the right type and size for your child. A very
young child’ship bonesare so small that a
regular belt might not stay
low onthe hips,as it
should. Instead, the belt
will likely be overthe
child’s abdomen.In a crash, the belt
would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough
for one is always properly
restrained ina child or infant restraint.
1Wants need completesupport, including supportfor the
head and neck.This is necessary because an infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can
be distributed across the strongest part
of the infant’s
body, the back and shoulders.A baby should be secured
in an appropriate infant restraint.
This is so important that
many hospitals today won’t release a newborn infant to
its parents unless there is
an infant restraint available for
the baby’s fist trip in a motor vehicle.
1-33
ICAUTION: (Continued)
at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 2404b. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby
would be almostimpossible
to hold.
Secure the babyin an infant restraint.
I
I
/rl CAUTION:
I
Never hold a baby in your arms
while riding in
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby
will become so
heavy you can’t holdit. For example, ina crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-34
Built-in Child Restraint (Option)
The child should also be at
least one year old.It is
important to use a rear-facing infant restraint until
the child is about a year old.
A rear-facing restraint
gives the infant’s head, neck and body the support they
would needin a crash. See “Child Restraints” later in
this sectionfor more information.
If your vehicle has this option, there’s a built-in child
restraint inthe center rear seat position. This child
restraint system conformsto all applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
This child restraint is designed for use only by children
who weigh between22 and 60 pounds (10 and 27 kg)
and whose height is between33.5 and 51 inches (850 and
1 295 m)and who are capableof sitting upright alone.
With this built-in child restraint, you can adjust the height
of the harness. Depending on the seated height of the
child, you can routeit through the upperpair of slots (A),
the middle pair of slots(B) or the lowerpair of slots (C).
1-35
Q: Which slots shouldI use formy child?
A:
With the child seated on the child restraint cushion,
use the pair of slots thatis at or just above the top
of the child’s shoulders.
For the child shown here, the harness should go through
the middle pairof slots (B).
1-36
Q: What if the top ofmy child’s shouldersis above
the highest pair of
slots?
A:
A child whose shoulders are abovethe highest slots
shouldn’t use this child restraint. Instead, the child
should sit on the vehicle’s seat cushion and use the
vehicle’s safety belts.
MAKE SURETHE TOP OF THE CHILD’S
SHOULDERS IS BELOW THE SLOTS
THAT THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH.
A CHILD WHOSE SHOULDERS ARE
ABOVE THOSE SLOTS COULD BE INJURED
DURING A SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. IF’
THE TOPOF THE CHILD’S SHOULDERS
IS ABOVE THE SLOTS, DON’T USE THIS
CHILD RESTRAINT. INSTEAD,THE
CHILD SHOULDSIT ON THE VEHICLE’S
REGULAR SEATAND USE THE REGULAR
SAFETY BELTS.
Adjusting the Harness Height
2. If the left and right halvesof the shoulder harness
clip are fastened together, separate them.
1. Lower the child restraint cushion.
1-37
3. If the lap-shoulder harnessis buckled, unlatchit by
pushing the button on the buckle.
1-38
4. Pull down the seatback partof the pad (D).
5. Select one side of the harness. Add some slack to the
shoulder part by pulling up
on the lap part. You’ll
keep most of this slack until you finishStep 9.
6. Feed a small amountof harness slack back into
the slot.
7. Twist the harness slightly to removeit from the slot.
1-39
8. Move the harness up or down tothe correct slot. The
correct slot is the one that will be just
at or
above the
top of the child's shoulder.
9. Twist the harness slightly to route
it through the
correct slot.
10. Pull on the harness. Make sureisitproperly routed
and isn't twisted or flipped over.
11. Repeat Steps5 through 10 for the other sideof
the harness. Be sure both sides are adjusted to the
same height.
1-40
12. Move the pad back againstthe child restraint
seatback. Make surethe harness goes throughthe
slots in the pad that match the height adjustment
slots being used.
for your child, you’re ready to use
the child restraint’s
harness (E) to secure your child.
Don’t usethe vehicle’s safety belts.
13. Press the upper edge of the pad againstthe
fastener strip.
Securing a Child in the Built-in
Child Restraint
Now that the hamessis adjusted tothe correct height
Using the vehicle’s regular safety belts
on a child
seated on the childrestraint cushion can cause
serious injury to the child in a sudden or
stop
proper size for the built-in
crash. If a child is the
child restraint, secure the child using the child
restraint’s harness. But children
who are too
large for the built-in childrestraint should sit on
the vehicle’s regular seatand use the regular
safety belts.
WARNING! FAILURETO FOLLOW THE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ON THE
USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
CAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKINGTHE
VEHICLE’S INTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN
STOP
CRASH.
OR
I
SNUGLY ADJUST THE BELTS PROVIDED WITH
THIS CHILD RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR
CHILD.
1-41
1. If the left and right halvesof the shoulder harness
clip are fastened together, separate them.
2. If the lap-shoulder harnessis buckled, unlatch it by
pushing the button on the buckle.
3. Place the child on the child restraint cushion.
1-42
Be sure the buckle
is free of any foreign objects that
may prevent you from securing
the latch plates. If
you can’t secure a latch plate, see your dealer
for
service before usingthe child restraint.
6. In a single motion, pull
the other side of the harness
all theway out. Keeping the harness pulledall the
way out, placeit over the child’s shoulder.
4. Select onlyone side of the harness. Pull thelap part
of the harness out, and place
the harness overthe
child’s shoulder.
If both sidesof the harness are pulled out, thelap
parts will lock.If the lap parts lock, let both sidesof
the harness go backall the way so each side will
move freely again. Then repeat this step, pulling
only one side of the harness out.
5. Push the latch plate (F) into the buckle untilit clicks.
7. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.
1-43
pull on both latch plates
to make sure theyare
secure. A green indicator will show
in each latch
plate window (G).
Ifthe harness locks before thelatch plate reaches the
buckle, let the harnessgo ;illthe way back so it will
move freelyagain. Then repeatSteps 6 and 7. Be
sure to keep the harness pulled
all the way out until
vou buckleit.
unce both sidesof the lap-shoulder harness are
pulled outof the retractor and buckled, the harness
will lock.
8. Now fasten the left and right halves
of the shoulder
(H) on
harness clip together. The indicator window
the clip will show green when the two halves are
fastened together. The purposeof this clipis to help
keep the harness positioned on the child's shoulders.
1-44
-
A CAUTION:
An unfastened shoulder harness clip won't help
keep the harnessin place on the child's shoulders.
If the harness isn't on
the child's shoulders,it
won't be able to restrain the child'supper body
in a sudden stop
or crash. The child could be
seriously injured. Makesure the harness clip
is
properly fastened.
9. On both sidesof the harness, pull upon the lap part
a little to be sureit's locked.
If the harnessisn't locked, or ifit becomes too tight,
unfasten the harness clip. Then unlatch the harness
by pushing the buttonon the buckle, andlet both
sides of the harness goall the way backso they will
move freely again. Then, repeat Steps
4 through 8.
If the harnessstill doesn't lock, don't use the child
restraint. See your dealer to have the built-in child
restraint serviced.
1-45
Removing the Child from the Built-in
Child Restraint
10. Adjust the positionof the harness on the child’s
shoulders by moving the clip up or down along the
harness. On each side of the harness, the shoulder
part should be centered on
the child’s shoulder. The
1. Unfasten the shoulder harness clip.
harness should be awayfrom the child’s face and
neck, but not fallingoff the child’s shoulders.
1-46
Storing the Built-in Child Restraint
Always properly storethe built-in child restraint
before usingthe vehicle’s lap beltin the center rear
seat position.
1. Buckle the harness and fasten the harness clip.
2. Unlatch the harness by pushing the buttonon
the buckle.
3. Move one side of the harness off the child’s
shoulder, andlet the harness go all theway back.
4. Move the other side of the harnessoff the child’s
shoulder, andlet it go all the way back.
5. Remove the child from the child restraint cushion.
2. Fold the child restraint cushion and leg restup into
the seatback.
3. Press the child restraint cushion firmly into the seatback.
1-47
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.
What are the different types
of add-on
child restraints?
A:
4. Then press the leg rest firmly into the seatback, and
secure it by pressing the upper corners against the
fastener strips on the seatback.
Just like the other restraint systemsin your vehicle, your
built-in child restraint needs to be periodically checked
and may need to have parts replaced after a crash. See
“Checking Your Restraint Systems” and “Replacing Seat
and Restraint SystemParts After a Crash” in the Index.
1-48
Add-on child restraints are available infour
basic types. When selecting a child restraint,
take into consideration not only the child’s weight
and size, but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
An infant car bed(A) is a special bed made
for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure thatthe infant’s head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant restraint(B) positions an infant
to facethe rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designedfor infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one yearof age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have
the support they needin a
crash. Some infant seats come in two
parts -- the
base stays securedin the vehicle and the seatpart
is removable.
1-49
1-50
A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designedto help protect
children who are fi-om20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and
about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height., or up
to around four yearsof age. One type,a convertible
restraint., is designed to be used either as a rear-facing
infant seat or a forward-facing child seat.
.
,'I
.'
L
I
.
1-51
When choosing a child restraint, be sure
the child
restraint is designed to be used
in a vehicle.If it is,
it will have a label saying that
it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You
may find these instructions on
the restraint itself orin a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system
in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance
of personal injury.
The instructions that come with
the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions are important,
so if either oneof these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy fromthe manufacturer.
A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about
four to eight yearsof age. It’s designedto improve
the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster
seats with shields use lap-only belts; however,
booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder
belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see
out the window.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your A child in a child
restraint in the centerfront seat
child restraintin the rear seat. Never put a rear-facing
can be badlyinjured or killed by theright front
child restraint inthe front passenger seat. Here’s why:
passenger air bag if it inflates, even though your
vehicle has reduced-forcefrontal air bags. Never
secure a childrestraint in the center front seat.
It’s always better to secure a child
restraint in the
rear seat. You may secure a forward-facing child
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be
restraint in theright front passenger seat,but
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air
before you do, always move
the front passenger
bag inflates, even though your vehicle has
seat asfar back as it will go. It’sbetter to secure
reduced-force frontal air bags. This is because
the childrestraint in arear seat.
the backof the rearfacing child restraint would
be very closeto the inflatingair bag. Always
Wherever you installit, be sure to securethe child
secure arearfacing child restraint in a rear seat.
restraint properly.
You may secure a forward-facing child
restraint
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
the
vehicle.
Be
sure
to
properly
secure
any
child
will go. It’s better to secure the childrestraint in
restraint in your vehicle-- even when no child is in
it.
a rear seat.
1-53
Canadian law requires that child restraints have
a top
strap, and that the strap be anchored.
If your child restraint has a top strap,
your dealer can
obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation
instructions specifically designedfor this vehicle. The
dealer can then install the anchor for you.
In Canada,
this work will be done
for you free of charge. Or, you
may install the anchor yourself using the instructions
provided in the kit.
.
.'.T
,
If your child'restraint has a top strap,
it should be
anchored. If you needto have an anchor installed, you
can ask your Chevrolet dealer to put
it in for you. If you
want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell
youhowtodo
it.
4
.-
i:
F?
4 .
A
-3
1-54
. . '4-
Securing aChild Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
U
You’ll be usingthe lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part
about the top strapif the child restraint has one.
Be sure
to followthe instructions that came with
the child
restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the
lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt throughor
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make surethe release button is
positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever hadto.
If the shoulder belt goes in
front of the child’sface
or neck, putit behind the child restraint.
1-55
4. Pull the restof the shoulder beltall the way out of
the retractor to setthe lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you're using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may findit helpful to useyour knee
to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten
the belt.
6 . Push and pull the child restraintin different
directions to be sureit is secure.
1-56
To remove the childrestraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let
it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint inthe Center
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using thelap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the childin the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badlyinjured or killed by the right front
passenger air bag if it inflates, even though your
vehicle has reduced-force frontal air bags. Never
secure a child restraint in the centerfront seat.
It’s alwaysbetter to secure a child
restraint in the
rear seat. You may secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat, but
before you do, always move
the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure
the childrestraint in arear seat.
See the earlierpart about thetop strap if the child
restraint has one.
1-57
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pullingit along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-58
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull itsfree end while you push
down on the child restraint.
If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it
helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6 . Push and pull the child restraintin different
directions to be sureit is secure.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt.It will be ready to work
for an adult or larger
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in theRight
Front Seat Position
I
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has reduced-forcefrontal air bags. This is
because the backof the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflatingair
bag. Always secure arearfacing child restraint
in therear seat.
.~.
Your vehicle hasa right front passenger air bag.Never
put a rear-facing child restraintin this seat. Here’s why:
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.
See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child
in the child restraint when and
as the instructionssay.
a right front passenger air
1. Because your vehicle has
bag, always move the seatas far back asit will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
1-59
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the
lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front
of the child’s face or
neck, putit behind the child restraint.
I
5. Pull the restof the shoulder beltall the wav out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make surethe release buttonis
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
Larger Children
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pullthe child restraint in different
directions to be sureit is secure.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt andlet it go back allthe way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
If you havethe choice, a child should
sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-61
Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they
are restrained in the rear
seat. But they need touse the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a
crash, thetwo children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must beused by
only one personat a time.
&.. What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
belt is
but thechild is so small that the shoulder
very close to thechild’s face or neck?
A:
1-62
Move the child toward the centerof the vehicle, but
be sure thatthe shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides’’ in the Index.
If
the child isso small that the shoulder beltis still
very close to the child’s
face or neck, you might
want to place the child
in the center seat position,
the one that has only alap belt.
Never do this.
that has a
Here a child is sitting in a seat
lap-shoulder belt,but the shoulderpart is behind
the child.If the child wears the belt
in this way, in
a crash the child might slide
under the belt. The
belt’s force wouldthen be applied right on the
child’s abdomen.That could cause seriousor
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, thelap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs.This applies belt forceto the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-63
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safety beltwill fasten around you, you
should use it.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.If your vehicle has a
built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure
the
harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look
for any other
loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child restraint
system parts. If yousee anything that might keep a
safety belt or built-in child restraint system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will orderyou an extender. It’sfree. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest
coat you will wear,so the
extender will be long enough
for you. The extender will
be just for you, andjust for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone
else use it, and useit
only for the seat it is made to fit.To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Tom or frayed safety belts may not protect you
in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn or
frayed harness straps canrip apart under impact forces
just like torn or frayed safety belts can. They may not
protect a child in a crash.
If a harness strap is torn or
frayed, get a new harness right away.
Also lookfor any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-64
If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps
are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also
may mean you will needto have safety belt, built-in
child restraint or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new safety beltsor
parts
and
repairs
may
be
necessary
even
if
the
safety
belt
built-in child restraint parts?
or built-in child restraint wasn’t being used
theattime
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. of the collision.
But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need
to replace air bag
straps were stretched, as they would ifbeworn during a
system parts. See the parton the air bag system earlier
more severe crash, then you need new safety belts or
in
this section.
harness straps.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-65
b%
1-66
NOTES
0Section 2
FeaturesandControls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained
are the instrument panel and
the warning systems that tell you if everything
is
working properly-- and what todo if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-5
2-9
2- 10
2-11
2-13
2- 14
2- 17
2-18
2-22
2-23
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-27
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
TrUIlk
Theft
[email protected] I1
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your EngineWhile You’re Parked
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-36
2-37
2-39
2-40
2-4 1
2-42
2-44
2-45
2-45
2-46
2-48
2-5 1
Windows
Horn
Tilt Steering Wheel
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Ashtrays and Lighter
Sun Visors
Auxiliary Power Connection
Sunroof (Option)
OnStar System (Option)
Instrument Panel-- Your Information System
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2-1
Keys
'
Leaving young childrenin a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
2-2
1
The ignition key isfor the
The ignition keys don’t have plugs.
Your dealer
or Chevrolet Roadside Assistance has the code
for
your keys.
The door key does have a plug. The plug has
a code on
it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how
to
make extra door keys. Keep the plugs in a safe place.
If
you lose your door keys, you’ll be able to have new ones
made easily using these plugs.
1
1 The door key isfor the
If you need a new ignition key, contact your dealer who
can obtain the correct key code, or, in an emergency, call
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance at 1 -800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872). In Canada,call 1-800-268-6800.
I NOTICE:
When a new vehicle is delivered,
the dealer removes
the plugs from the door keys and gives them to the
first owner.
Your vehicle has a number of new features
that can help prevent theft. But you can have a
lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever
lock your keys inside. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in.
So be sure you
have extra keys.
2-3
Door Locks
A CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall
out. When a door is
locked, the inside handlewon’t open it.
Outsiders caneasily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your
vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
--
--
From the inside, push the lever on the left (shown
above) to lock the door manually.
To unlock, pull
the lever.
Power Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. Press the power door lock switch on the right (shown
above) tolock or unlock all doors.
From the outside, use your door key or remote keyless
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
entry transmitterif your vehicle has this option.
The lever on each rear door works only that door’s lock.
It won’t lock or unlock allthe doors.
2-4
Rear-Door Child Security Locks
2. Close the door.
When these locks are set,
the inside door handles
will not openthe rear doors. Be sure tolet adults and
older children know how
the locks work and how to
cancel them.
3. Do the same thing onthe other rear door.
To use the rear-door child security locks:
To open a door when the security locks are set, unlock
the doorfrom the inside and then open the door using
the outside door handle.
If you want to cancel the
security locks, move the lever down.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leavingthe vehicle, take your keys, open your
door andset the locksfrom inside. Then getout and
close the door.
Remote Keyless Entry(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your trunk
from about 3 feet (1 m)
up to 30 feet (9 m) away usingthe remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your remote keyless entry transmitter operates on a
radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
1. Open the rear door. Use a key to move the lever all
the way up.
2-5
~
~~
~~
~~
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
~~
~
0
Check the distance.You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
0
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
This device complies with RSS-210
of Industry Canada.
0 If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
qualified technician for service.
(1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including Operation
interference thatmay cause undesired operationof
the device.
Press UNLOCK once to
unlock the driver’s door.
Lnanges or modifications to this system
by other than
Press UNLOCK again
an authorized service facility could void authorization
within five seconds to
to use this equipment.
unlock all remaining doors.
This system has a range of about
3 feet (1 m) up to
Pressing UNLOCK will
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in
also cause the vehicle’s
range. Thisis normal for any remote keyless entry
interior lampsto come on
system. If the transmitter does not work iforyou have
for a periodof time. (See
to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to
“Sustained Interior
work, try this:
Illumination” in the Index
for more details).
Check to determine if battery replacement or
transmitter resynchronizationis necessary. See the
instructions that follow.
2-6
To lock both doors, pressLOCK. To unlock the trunk,
press the trunk symbol onthe transmitter. The trunk
will only unlock if your transaxle
is in PARK (P);
pressing LOCK or the trunk symbol will also
cause
the vehicle’s interior lamps to come on
for a period
of time. (See “Sustained Interior Illumination”
in the
Index for more details).
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
Battery Replacement
Under normal use,the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
You can tellthe battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal
range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before
the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter
is coded to
prevent another transmitterfrom unlocking your vehicle.
NOTICE:
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
When replacing the battery, use care not to
remaining transmitters with you when
you go to your
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your
dealer. Whenthe dealer matches the replacement
body transferred to these surfaces may damage
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
the transmitter.
must alsobe matched. Once your dealer has coded
the
new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only
four transmitters
For battery replacement, use typeCR2032 or
matched to it.
an equivalent.
3. Snap the top and bottom together; make sure the
halves are together tightlyso water won’t getin.
4. Test the operationof the transmitter with your
vehicle. If the transmitter does not work,
try
synchronizing the transmitter with your receiver,
(located in your vehicle).
Synchronization
To replace the battery:
1. Insert aflat object like a dime into the slot on
the
back of the transmitter. Gently pry apart the
front
and back.
2. Remove the battery and replaceit with the new one,
making sure the positive(+) side of the battery is
facing down.
2-8
Synchronization may be necessary
due to the security
method used by this remote keyless entry system.
The
transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the
receiver. The receiver will not respond to a signal it
has previously been sent. This prevents someone from
recording and playing backthe signal from the
transmitter.
To resynchronize the transmitter with the receiver,
do the following: While standing close to your vehicle,
simultaneously press and hold the
LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the transmitter for about five seconds. The
door locks should cycle (lock and unlock) to confirm
synchronization. If the locksdo not cycle,see your
dealer for service.
Trunk
Trunk Lock
I
l o unlock the trunk from the outside, insert
the door
key and turnit. You can also use the remote keyless
entry functionif your vehicle has this option. Just press
the trunk symbol on the transmitter, making sure your
shift leveris in PARK (P).
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open becausecarbon monoxide (CO)gas can
come into yourvehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.
If you must drive with the
trunk lid openor if
electrical wiringor other cableconnections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
trunk lid:
Make sure allwindows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating cooling
or
system toits highest speed withthe setting
on VENT. That will force outsideair into
your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in
the Index.
If you have air outlets onor under the
instrument panel, open them allthe way.
See “Engine Exhaust’’ in theIndex.
Remote Trunk Release (Option)
Press the button under
the instrument panelon
the driver’s side.Your
transaxle shift lever must
be in PARK (P).
Remember, your trunk can be opened at any time using
this lock release,so be sure tolock your doors.
2-9
Theft
Parking Lots
Vehicle theft is big business, especially
in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number
of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put itoncan make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
If you park in lot
a where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock
it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key?
a If possible, park in a busy, well
lit area.
0
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves
-- so
don’t do it.
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock
the
storage area.
a Close all windows.
0
Lock the glove box.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, 0 Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
a Then take the door key and remote keyless entry
from the ignition and take
it with you. Alwaysdo this.
transmitter with you.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and
so will your
ignition and transaxle. And remember to lock
the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out
of sight.
Put themin a storage area,or take them with you.
2-10
PASS-Key’ I1
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key I1
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key I1 is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
It works when you insert
or remove the keyfrom
the ignition.
PASS-Key I1 uses a resistor pellet the
in ignition key
that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS-Key I1 system senses that someoneis
using the wrong key,it shuts downthe vehicle’s starter
and fuel systems. For about three minutes,
the starter
won’t work andfuel won’t go to the engine. If someone
tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key
during this time,the vehicle will not start. This
discourages someone from randomly trying different
keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to
make a match.
The ignition key must be clean and dry before it’s
inserted inthe ignition orthe engine may not start. If the
engine does not start and
the SECURITY light is on, the
key may be dirty or wet. Turn
the ignition off.
Clean and dry the key. Wait about three minutes and try
again. If the starter still won’t work, and
the key appears
to be clean and dry, wait about
three minutes and try
another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to
check the fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
Index). .Ifthe starter won’t work with the other key, your
vehicle needs service.If your vehicle does start, the first
ignition keymay be faulty.See your dealer or a
locksmith who can service the PASS-Key
11.
If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or
missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work and the
SECURITY light will come on. But you don’t have to
wait three minutes before trying another ignition
key.
2-11
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the
PASS-Key I1 to have a new key made.
If you’re ever driving and the SECURITY light comes
on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine
if you turnit off. Your PASS-Key I1 system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer.Your vehicle is not protectedby the
PASS-Key I1 system.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key
I1 ignition key, see
your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key I1
to have a new key made.In an emergency,call the
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Center
at
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872). In Canada,
call 1-800-268-6800.
2-12
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But itwill perform better in the long
run if you followthese guidelines:
Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for thefirst 500 miles (805
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for thefirst
200 miles (322km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’tyet broken
in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean
premature wear and earlierreplacement.
Follow this breaking-inguideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towinga Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
--
--
km).
LOCK (B): Before you put the keyinto the ignition
switch, the switch is in LOCK. It’s alsothe only position
in which you can remove your key. This position locks
your ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. It’s
a
theft-deterrent feature.
OFF (C): This positionlets you turnoff the engine but
still turnthe steering wheel.It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel. UseOFF if you must have your vehicle pushed
or towed.
RUN (D): This positionis where the key returns
after you start your vehicle. With the engine off, you
E
can use RUNto display someof your warning and
indicator lights.
START (E): This position starts your engine.
A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s
With the ignition key inthe ignition switch, you can turn door when the ignition isin OFF, LOCK or ACC and
the key is in the ignition.
the switchto five positions:
ACC (A):The accessory positionlets you use things
like the radio and windshield wipers when the engine
is
off. To use ACC, push in the key and turn
it toward you.
Your steering wheel will stay locked.
Ignition Positions
2-13
I
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and
you can’t
turn it, be sureyou are using the correctkey; if
so, is it all theway in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn the
key hard. But turn the
key only with your hand.
Using a tool to forceit could break thekey or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shiftto PARK (P) if your Chevrolet
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. Theidle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
Starting Your 3100 Engine
Move your shift leverto PARK (P) or NEUTRAL(N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position
-- that’s a
safety feature.To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
2-14
NOTICE:
Holding yourkey in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter
motor.
2. If your engine won’tstart (or starts but then stops),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal
all the way to the
floor and holdingit there as you holdthe key in
START for up to 15 seconds. Thisclears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Starting Your 3800 Series I1 Engine
Move your shiftlever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position
-- that’s a
safety feature.To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to workwith the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not
perform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual thattells how to doit
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in theIndex.
Don’t try to shift toPARK (P) if your Chevrolet
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key toSTmT. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your
engine gets warm.
2-15
I
NOTICE:
Holding yourkey in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to
be drained muchsooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter
motor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START for about three tofive seconds at a time
until your engine starts. Wait about15 seconds
between eachtry to help avoid draining your battery
or damaging your starter.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed towork with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates.Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform
properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see
the partof this manual that
tells how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
3. If your enginestill won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding
it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do
the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds.
This clearsthe extra gasolinefrom the engine.
After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normal
starting procedure.
2-16
!
I
I
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located behind the vehicle’s passenger side
headlamp fixture.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
A CAUTION:
In very cold weather,0 OF (- 18 C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
O
~
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could causean electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug
the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, usea
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as
it was before to keep
it
away from moving engine parts.If you don’t, it
could be damaged.
2-17
I
I
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends onthe outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here,
we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you
the best advicefor that
particular area.
There are several different positions
for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It’s the best
position to use whenyou start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
It is dangerous toget out of your vehicle if tl
shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the
Your automatic transaxle may have a shift lever on the
steering columnor on the console between the seats.
Maximum engine speed is limitedon automatic
transaxle vehicles, when you’re inPARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline components from
improper operation.
2-18
parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll,
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.
To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shiftlever to PARK (P).
See ‘‘Shifting Into PARK (P)” in theIndex. If
you’re pulling a trailer,
see “Towing a Trailer’’ in
the Index.
Make surethe shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle
Shift Interlock.You must fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shiftfrom PARK (P) when the ignitionis
in RUN. If you cannot shift
out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever by pushing it allthe way into
PARK (P) while keepingthe brake pedal pushed down.
Release the shift lever button if you haveconsole
a
shift.
Then move the shift leverout of PARK (P), being sure
to press the shiftlever button if you have a console shift.
See “Shifting Outof PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R):Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect withthe wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while your engineis “racing” (running at high
speed) is dangerous. Unless your footis firmly
on the brakepedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N)while your engineis racing.
Shifting toREVERSE (R)while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift toREVERSE (R)only after yourvehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and
forth to get outof snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle,
see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
2-19
I NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused
by shifting out
of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly,
or if it seems not to shift gears you
as go faster,
something may be wrong with your transaxle;
your vehicle may default to SECOND(2).
However if you drive veryfar that way, your
vehicle can be damaged. So if this happens, have
your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you
can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 kmh) and AUTOMATIC
for higherspeeds.
OVERDRIVE (0)
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (GB):This positionis for
normal driving.If you need more powerfor passing,
and you’re:
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal allthe way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
DRIVE (D): This position is also usedfor normal
driving, butit offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@).
Here are some times you might choose DRIVE (D)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(a):
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
0
When towing a trailer, so thereis less shifting
between gears.
When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power
but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed
as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use
your brakes off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t drive inSECOND (2)for more than
25 miles (41 km)at speeds over55 mph
(90 km/h), or you can damage yourtransaxle.
Use DRIVE (D) or AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (@)as much aspossible.
Don’t shift into SECOND(2) unless you are going
slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage yourengine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lowerfuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the
shift leveris put in FIRST (l),the transaxle won’t shift
into first gear until the vehicle
is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your frontwheels can’t rotate,don’t try to
drive. This might happenif you were stuck in
very deep sandor mud or
were up againsta solid
object. You could damage yourtransaxle.
Also, if you stop whengoing uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This couldoverheat and damage the
transaxle. Use your brakes or
shift intoPARK (P)
to holdyour vehicle in positionon a hill.
2-21
Parking Brake
ITo set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake
pedal down with your
right foot. Push down the
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake
on can cause
your rear brakesto overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any
hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to dofirst to keep the trailerfrom moving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your
right foot and push the parking
brake pedal with yourleft foot. When you lift your left
foot, the parking brake pedal will followit to the
released position.
2-22
I
Shiftiy Into PARK (P)
Column Shift
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
It can be dangerous to get out
of your V I icle if
(P)with the
the shift lever is not fully PARK
in
parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll.If
you have leftthe engine running,the vehicle can
move suddenly.You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pullinga trailer, see“Towing a
Trailer” inthe Index.
2. Move the shift lever into thePARK (P) position
like this:
I
0
Pull the lever toward you.
2-23
Console Shift
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right
foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift leverinto the PARK (P) position
like this:
0
Hold in the button on the
lever and push the lever
all the way toward the
front of your vehicle.
Move the lever up asfar as it will go.
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key
in your
hand, your vehicleis in PARK (P).
3. Move the ignition key toLOCK.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you.If you can
leave your vehicle with
the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicleis in PARK (P).
2-24
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on hill
a and you don’t shift your
transaxle intoPARK (P) properly,the weight of the
vehicle may put too much
force on the parking pawl
in
CAUTIdN:
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the prevent torque lock,set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s
engine running. Your vehicle could move
seat. To find out how, see “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” in
suddenly if the shift lever
is not fully in
PARK (P)
the Index.
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you releasethe parking brake.
overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours alittle uphill to take someof the
engine running unlessyou have to.
pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle,so you
can pull the shift lever outof PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, besure your vehicle isin PARK (P) and your
parking brake isfirmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve movedthe shift lever into the PARK (P)
position, holdthe regular brake pedal down. Then,
see
if you can movethe shift lever awayfrom PARK (P)
without first pulling it toward you (or, if you have the
console shift lever, without first pushing the button).
If
you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t
fully locked
into PARK (P).
IA
2-25
1
I
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock
(BTSI). You must fully apply your regular brakes before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignitionis in
RUN. See “Automatic Transaxle Operation” in
the Index.
If you cannot shift out
of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P)
while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Release the
shift lever buttonif you havea console shift. Then move
the shift lever out
of PARK (P), being sure to press the
shift lever buttonif you havea console shift,
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but
still can’t
shift outof PARK (P), try this:
E
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Apply and hold the brake until the end ofStep 4.
Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
Start the engine and shiftto the drive gear you want.
Have the vehicle fixed as soon asyou can.
2-26
1
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
I
1
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
Engine Exhaust
It’s better not to
park with the engine running. But you
if
ever haveto, here are some things
to know.
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO),which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged ina collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road
or over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately,
Idling theenglne with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling ina closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even
if the fanswitch isat the highest setting.One
place this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park ina
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can bea blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
--
L
J
2-27
A CAUTION:
Power Windows (Option)
It can be dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if
the shiftlever is not fullyin PARK (P) with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
To be sure your
You or others could be injured.
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your
parking brake and
move the shiftlever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper stepsto be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking ona hill and if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
2-28
Switches on the driver’s door armrest control each of the
windows when the ignitionis on or inACC. In addition,
each of the passenger’s doors has a switch
for its
own window.
The driver’s window switch hasan auto-down feature.
This switchis labeled AUTO. Tap the bottomof the
switch, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. If the bottom of the switch
is pressed all the
way down, the window willgo all theway down.
To stop the window whileit is lowering, press thefront
of the switch.To raise the window, press and hold the
front of the switch.
The driver’s window controls also include a lock-out
switch. PressLOCK OUT to stop front and rear
passengers from using their window switches.
The
driver canstill control all the windows with the lock on.
Press the switch again for normal operation. Whenthe
orange band on the switch
is showing, the passengers
can operate their windows.
Tilt Steering Wheel
I
A tilt steering wheel allows
you to adjustthe steering
wheel before you drive.
You can also raiseit to the
highest levelto give your
legs more room when you
exit and enter the vehicle.
Horn
Press on or along
the top edge of your steering wheel
horn symbols to soundthe horn.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever as shown. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
2-29
lbrn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When theturn is finished, the lever will return automatically.
-
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flashin the
direction of the turnor
lane change.
To signal a lane change,
just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold
it there until you
complete your lane change. The
lever will return by
itself when you release
it.
As you signal aturn or a lane change, if the arrow
flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb
may be burned
out and other drivers won'tsee your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replaceit to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don'tgo on at all when you
signal a turn, check
for burned-out bulbs and check the
fuse (see "Fuses and Circuit Breakers" in the Index).
2-30
Headlamp High/LowBeam
To change your headlamps
from low beam to high
beam, or high to low, pull
the multifunction leverall
the way toward you. Then
release it.
When the high beams are on, a lighton the instrument
panel also willbe on.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield
wipers by turning the band
marked WIPER. For a
single wiping cycle,turn the
band to MIST. Hold it there
until the wipers start, then
let go. The wipers will stop
after one cycle. If you want
more cycles, hold the band
on MIST longer.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the bandLO.
to For
high-speed wiping, turnthe band further, toHI. To stop
the wipers, turn the band to OFF.
You can set the wiper speedfor a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or
snow. Turn the band to choosethe delay time. The
closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
Be sure to clear
ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them.If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
If your blades do become
damaged, get new bladesor blade inserts.
Heavy snow orice can overload your wipers.
A circuit
breaker will stop them until
the motor cools. Clear away
snow orice to prevent an overload.
2-31
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
At the top of the multifunction lever, there’s a paddle
with the wordPUSH on it.To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will runfor
several sweeps and then either stop or return to your
preset speed.
~
-
-7
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your
vision.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed
of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes,the cruise control
shuts off.
2-32
/d CAUTION:
0
0
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you
can’t drivesafely at a steadyspeed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or inheavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause
needless wheel
spinning, andyou could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
I
A CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise controlswitch on when
you’re not using cruise,you might hita button
and go into cruisewhen you don’t want to. You
could bestartled andeven lose control. Keep the
cruise controlswitch off until you want touse it.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push in the SET button
at the endof the lever
and release it.
M I S ‘I
T
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
2-33
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed There are two ways to to
goa higher speed:
and then you applythe brake. This shuts off the cruise
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
control, but you don’t need to reset
it when you want
Push theSET button at the endof the lever, then
to resume your previous speed.
release the button and
the accelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise at the higher speed.
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
Move the cruise switch fromON to WA. Hold it
you can move the cruise
there until you get up
to the speed you want, then
control switchfrom ON to
release the switch.(To increase your speedin very
WA (Resume/Accelerate)
small amounts, move the switch to R/A. Each
for about half a second.
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.)
The accelerate feature will only work after
you set the
cruise control speedby pushing the SET button.
2-34
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and
the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the
0 Push in the SET button until you reach the lower
accelerator pedalto maintain your speed. When going
speed you want, then release it.
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
0 To slow down in very small amounts, push theSET
to keep your speed down.Of course, applyingthe brake
button for less than half a second. Each time you do takes you outof cruise control. Many drivers find this
to
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on
steep hills.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When Ending Cruise Control
you take yourfoot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow There are two ways to turn
off the cruise control:
down tothe cruise control speed youset earlier.
0 Step lightly on the brake pedal; OR
There are two waysto reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
0
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Cruise Speed Memory
When you turnoff the cruise control or the ignition, or
shift into PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), your cruise
control set speed memoryis erased.
2-35
Exterior Lamps
PC
Turn the knob to this symbol (B) to turn on
the parking and other operating lamps without
the headlamps.
-‘QTurn
- the knob to this symbol (C) to turn on
t ,
the headlamps and other operating lamps.
Turn the knob toOFF to turn off the lamps.
A warning chime will sound when you turn the ignition
switch toOFF, LOCK or ACC with the lamps on.
Daytime Running Lamps/ Automatic
Headlamp Control
The lamp controls are on
the instrument panel. They
control these systems:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Headlamps
Taillamps
ParkingLamps
LicenseLamps
SidemarkerLamps
Instrument Panel Lights
CourtesyLamps
Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the frontof your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful
in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful
in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
A light sensoron top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work,so be sureit isn’t covered.
The DRL system will make your high-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when:
0
The ignition is on,
0
The headlamp switch is off and
0
The parking brake is released.
When the DRL areon, only your reduced intensity
high-beam headlamps will beon. The taillamps,
sidemarker andother lamps won’t be on. Your
instrument panel won’t be
lit up either.
When it’s dark enough outside, your DRL will turn off
and your low-beam headlamps will turn
on. The other
lamps that come on with your headlamps will also
come on.
When it’s bright enough outside, the low-beam
headlamps will go out, and
DRL turns on your
high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity.
Courtesy Lamps
When any dooris opened, several lamps comeon. These
lamps are courtesy lamps. They make it easy
for you to
enter and leave your vehicle.You can also turn these
lamps on by movingthe dial near the headlamp knob all
the way up.
Some of the lamps have switchesso you can turn them
on, even when the doorsare closed. These lampsare
reading lamps.To avoid draining your battery,
be sure to
turn off all reading lamps when leaving your vehicle.
Sustained Interior Illumination
To idle your vehicle with the
DRL off, set the parking
brake while the ignitionis in OFF or LOCK. Then start
your vehicle.The DRL will stay off until you release
the
parking brake.
Your courtesy lamps will come
on and stay onfor a set
time whenever vou:
0
Open a door.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you needit.
0
Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped).
Interior Lamps
0
Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter
(if equipped).
0
Press the trunk symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped).
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lamps
by
moving the dial (A) (located next tothe headlamp
switch). See “Exterior Lamps” text earlierin this
section. If you turnthe dial all the way up, your courtesy
or interior lamps will come on.
2-37
If you open a door, the lamps will stay on while it’s
open and then turn off automatically about
18 seconds
after you closeit. If you don’t open a door, the lamps
will turn off after about18 seconds, unless you press
UNLOCK or the trunk symbol on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.If you press UNLOCK or the trunk
symbol and don’t open a door, the lamps will
turn off
after about55 seconds. If you press LOCK on the
remote keyless entry transmitter the lamps will off
turn
about 17 seconds after all the doors are closed.
Rearview Mirror Reading Lamps
Sustained interior illumination includes a feature called
theater dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps don’t
just turn off at the endof the delay time. Instead, they
slowly dim during the delay time until they
go out. The
delay timeis canceled if you turn the ignition key
to
RUN or START, so the lamps willgo out right away.
When the ignition is on, sustained interior illumination
is inactive, which means the courtesy lamps won’t
come on.
2-38
These lamps go on when you open the doors. When
the doors are closed, turn the lamps on and uff with
the switches.
Battery Saver
Your vehicle has afeature to help prevent you from
draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave
the
courtesy lamps on.If you leave the dial turned allthe
way up, orif you leave a door open,the lamps will
automatically turnoff after 10 minutes if the ignition
is off.
Manual Outside Mirrors
Adjust the right mirrorby
hand. To adjust theleft
mirror, movethe knob in
the direction you want
to
move the mirror.
This feature will not turn off the reading lamps, only
the lamps controlledby the dial. Be sure to turn off
any reading lamps using the switch before you leave
the vehicle.
Mirrors
Adjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
You can adjustthe mirror for day or night driving. Press
the tab forward (awayfrom you) for day driving.Pull
the tab back (toward you)
for night driving.
Power Outside Mirrors (If Equipped)
The power mirror controlis
on the driver’s door. Turn
the control tothe left to
adjust the left mirroror to
the right to adjust the right
mirror. Then movethe
control in the direction you
want to move the mirror.
2-39
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.A convex
mirror’s surface is curvedso you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
I A-CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
Use the door keyto lock and unlockthe glove box.
To open, lift the latch.
2-40
Storage Armrest
To use the storage area,
fold down the armrest. Press
the latchon the front edge
of the armrest and pull up.
To use the cupholder,flip
it forward.
Instrument Panel Cupholder
cupholder,
this To use
slide it out of the
instrument panel.It is
located underneath your
audio system.
Door Storage Compartments
Convenience Net (Option)
Each of the doors has a storage compartment.
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll
see it
just inside the back wall
of the trunk.
Center Console
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns
or
quick starts and stops.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads.Store them in the
trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the netso that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
Ashtrays and Lighter
The center front ashtray may beon the instrument panel
or on the console.To remove the instrument panel
ashtray, open it, push down on the locking tab and pull
out the ashtray.
Your vehicle may have a rear ashtray. isItlocated
of your console. Push on
To open the storage area, press the button located on the within a small door at the rear
the right side of the door. The ashtray will then rotate to
left front edge of the storage door and
lift the cover.The
the rightfor usage. You can only access the ashtrayby
console has a cassette and CD storage bin and a
pushing on the door’s right side.To remove the ashtray,
cupholder. To use the cupholder for large cups, remove
push down on the snuffer located in the middle
of the
the insert.
ashtray and lift it out.
2-41
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn
into your ashtrays.If you do, cigarettesor
other smoking materials could set them
on fire,
causing damage.
To use the lighter,just push it in all theway and let go.
When it’s ready,it will pop back by itself.
I NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter with
in your hand
while it is heating.If you do,it won’t beable to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can makeit overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
I
2-42
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You
can also move them from side to side.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Open the cover to exposethe vanity mirror. Forthe
driver’s mirror, slide the cover
to the side. Forthe
passenger’s mirror,lift the cover.The lamps will come
on when you openthe cover onthe passenger’s visor.
3. Use a screwdriver to screw the locator post
into the
vehicle’s carpeting. Press down while turning to
allow the locator “auger point”to pierce the floor
carpet. The locator will not screw down tightly, but
will rotate freely when installed properly.
Floor Mats (Option)
Usage
...... ..
View A
1. To remove the mat, pull up on the rear
of the mat to
unsnap it from the locator post(see view B).
2. To re-install the mat, align the grommet inthe mat
over the locator post and push down to snap
the mat
into place (see view
B).
View B
Installation
1. Move the driver’s seat toits most rearward position.
2. Locate the driver’s side floor mat in the vehicle
with the rear of the mat against theleft (outboard)
front edge of the seat track mounting bracket (see
view A).
2-43
Auxiliary Power Connection
Your vehicle is equipped
with auxiliary power leads.
These leads can be used
to power aftermarket
electrical equipment
added to your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle
can damageit or keep other things from working
as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment and never use anything that
exceeds the fuse rating.
They are located on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle,
below the glovebox and behind whatis referred to asa
“hush panel.” For additional information
on accessing
these leads and electrical hookup, please refer to a
service manual.To order a service manual,see “Service
Publications, Ordering” in the Index.
2-44
I
Sunroof (Option)
OnStar System (Option)
This system may be obtainedfrom your dealer. The
following services are available24 hours a day:
0 Roadside Service with Location
0
Emergency Services Button
0
Remote Door Unlock
Theft DetectiodNotification of Air Bag Deployment
Customer Convenience Services
For more information, contact your dealer.
Cellular Telephone (Option)
Your vehicleis prewired for dealer installation
of a Chevrolet fixed mobile or portable hand-held
Your sunroof includes a sliding glass panel and a sliding
cellular telephone. For more information,
see
sunshade. The sunroof switch
is located between the sun
your dealer.
visors just ahead of the sunroof and works only when
the ignition is on.
To open the glass panel and sunshade, press
the rear of
the switch (OPEN).Let go of the switch to stop the
panel in any position. Pressthe fiont of the switch,
(CLOSE), to closethe glass panel.The sunshade can
only be closed by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannotbe opened or closedif
your vehicle has an electrical failure.
2-45
Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
@\
2-46
A. Vents
E. Audio System
B. Instrument Cluster
E Ashtray and Lighter
C. Climate Controls/Rear Defogger
G. Remote Trunk Release
D. Glove Box
H. Lamp Controls
2-47
Instrument Panel Cluster
\
\
VOLTS
AIR BAG
Standard Cluster: United States Version Shown, Canadian Similar
Your instrument clusteris designed to let youknow at a glancehow your vehicle is running.
You’ll know how fast
you’re going, abouthow much fuel is in your tank and many other things you need to drive safely and economically.
2-48
0
HOT
Optional Cluster: United States VersionShown, Canadian Similar
2-49
Speedometer/Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speedin both miles
(km/h). Your
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour
odometer shows howfar your vehicle has been driven in
either miles (used in the United States) or in kilometers
(used in Canada).
Tachometer
The tachometer displays
the engine speed in
thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
If you see
silver lines betweenthe numbers, you’ll know someone
has probably tampered withit and the numbers may not
be correct.
You may wonder whathappens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. Ifthe new one can be set to the
mileage totalof the old odometer, then that
is what will
be done. If it can’t, thenit will be set at zero and a label
NOTICE:
must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
in
the red area, or engine damage
may occur.
Trip Odometer
Your trip odometer tells howfar you have driven since
you last reset it.To set it to zero, press the reset button.
2-50
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning
lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle.The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is
wrong beforeit becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also
save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may or
be is a
problem with oneof your vehicle’s functions.As you
will see in the details onthe next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when youstart the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you
are familiar with this section, you should not be
alarmed when this happens.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on when youare driving, or when oneof the gages
shows there may be a problem, check
the section that
tells you what to do about
it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairscan be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the keyis turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come onfor about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless
the driver’s safety belt
is already buckled.
The safety belt light
will also come on and
stay on until the driver’s
belt is buckled.
Gages can indicate when there
may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work togetherto let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
2-51
Air Bag Rc iliness Light
Charging System Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIRBAG or the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system
for
malfunctions. The light tells you
if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors,
the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the air
bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.
AIR BAG
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flashfor a few
seconds. Thenthe light
should go out.This means
the system is ready.
VOLTS
If it stayson, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the charging system. It could
indicate that you have a loose drive belt or another
electrical problem. Haveit checked right away. Driving
while this light is on could
drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such the
as radio
and air conditioner.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash
for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition keyRUN.
to If the
light doesn’t come on then, have
it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
2-52
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn onthe ignition, as
a check to show you it’s
working. Then it should
go out.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system
is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working,the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comeson, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should comeon
’ briefly when you turn the
ignition key toRUN. If it
BRAKE
doesn’t come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready
1 to warn you if there’s
1
a problem.
~
If the light comes on while you driving,
are
pull off the
road and stop carefully.
You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer
thetofloor.
It may take longerto stop. If the light is still on, orif the
anti-lock brake system warning
light is flashing, have
the vehicle towedfor service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” and “Towing Your Vehicle”
in
the Index.)
,ACAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident.If the light is still on or if the
anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing
after you’ve pulledoff the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignition ison, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brakefully
is
released, it means you have a brake problem.
2-53
_____
~
~
-
Anti-Lock Brake Svstem Warning
Light (Option)
U
ANTI LOCK
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on whenyou start
your engine and it will
stay on for three seconds.
That’s normal.
Your regular brake system may not be working
properly if the anti-lock brake system warning
light is flashing. Driving with the anti-lock
brake system warning light flashing can lead
to an accident. After you’ve pulled
off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
If the light flashes when you’re driving, you don’t have
anti-lock brakes and there could be a problem with your
You
regular brakes. Pulloff the road and stop carefully.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays
on
may notice that the pedal is harder to push.
Or, the pedal
longer than normal after you’ve started your engine,
turn
may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop.
the ignition off. Or,if the light comes on and stays
on
Have the vehicle towed for service. (See
“Towing Your
when you’re driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn
Vehicle” in the Index.)
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
or comes on again
system. If the light still stays on,
while you’re driving,your vehicle needs service. If the
light is on but not flashing and the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes,you
but
don’t have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly whenyou turn the ignitionkey toRUN. If the
it fixed so it will be
light doesn’t come on then, have
ready to warn youif there is a problem.
2-54
Anti-Lock Brake System Active
Light (Option)
LOW
TRAC
When your anti-lock system
is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid,
the anti-lock brake system
active light will come on.
Slippery road conditions may
exist if this light comes
on, so adjust your driving accordingly. The
light will
stay on for a few seconds after the system stops
adjusting brake pressure.
Engine Coolant Temperature Light
HOT
This light tells you that
your engine coolant has
overheated or your radiator
cooling [email protected]) are not
working.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions,you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle and turn
off the engine as soon as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating”in the Index.
The anti-lock brake systemactive light also comes on
briefly when you turn the ignition key
to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be
there totell you when the systemis active.
2-55
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
100
You have a gage that shows
the engine coolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves intothe red
area, your engine is too hot!
Low Coolant Warning Light
If this light comes on, your
system is low on coolant
LOW
engine
the
and
may
overheat. See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index and
have your vehicle serviced
k
as soon as you can.
I
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
That reading meansthe same thing asthe warning light.
If you
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you shouldpull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-56
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operationof the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD11(On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels
for
the life of the vehicle, helpingto produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes onto indicate that thereis a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent.
This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
This light should comeon, as a check to show youit is
working, when the ignition is on and
the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have
it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction one
in
of two ways:
0
Light Flashing-- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
0
Light On Steady-- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
If the Light Is Flashing
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
The following may prevent more serious damage to
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
your vehicle:
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be 0 Reducing vehicle speed.
covered by your warranty.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
0 If you are towing a trailer, reduce
the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as
it is possible.
2-57
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe todo so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see
“If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the
light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, anddrive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center
for service.
If the LightIs On Steady
You may be able to correct
the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuelinto your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel
cap has beenleft off or improperly installed.A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly
installed should turn the light
off.
Did youjust drive through adeep puddle of water?
2-58
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out.A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more
of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require
at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn
the light off.
If none ofthe above steps have made the light
turn off,
have your dealeror qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Oil Warning Light
OIL
If you have a problem with
your oil, this light may stay
on after you start your
engine, or come on when
you are driving.
This indicates thatoil is not going through your engine
quickly enough to keepit lubricated. The engine could
be low onoil or could have some otheroil problem.
Have it fixed right away.
The oil light could also come on in two other situations:
0
When the ignition ison but the engine is not running,
the light will come on as
a test to show youit is
working, but thelight will go out when you turn the
the
ignition toSTART. If it doesn’t come on with
ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse
or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
0
If you makea hard stop, the light may come on
for a
moment. This is normal.
Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your enginecan become so hot thatit
catches fire. You or otherscould be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Damage to your
engine fromneglected oil
problems can becostly and is not coveredby
your warranty.
2-59
Low Oil Level Light
LOW
OIL
Change Oil Soon Light
Your engine is equipped
with an oil level monitoring
system. When the ignition
key is turned on, the LOW
OIL light will briefly flash.
CHG
OIL
SOON
The CHG OIL SOON
light should come
on as a bulb check when
you start the engine.
If the light does not flash, have
it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If this light stayson for about 20 seconds after you turn
on the ignition, have the oil changed.
If the light stays on,
stop the vehicle on a level surface
and turn the engineoff. Check the oil level using the
engine oil dipstick. (See. “Engine Oil”
in the Index.)
If the light does notflash, have the low oil level sensor
system repaired so it will be readyto warn you if
there’s a problem.
When to change your oil also depends on driving habits
and conditions because they directly affect engine speed,
coolant temperature and vehicle speed. Because
of this,
the CHG OILSOON light may come on as early
as
2,000 miles (3,200 km) or lessfor harsh conditions.
The oil level monitoring system only checks the
oil level
during the brief period between key on and engine
crank. It does not monitorthe engine oil level when the
engine is running. Additionally, anoil level checkis
only performedif the engine has been turned
off for a
considerable periodof time, allowing the oil normally
in
circulation to drain back into the
oil pan.
2-60
Also see “Maintenance Schedule”in the Indexfor
further instructions on when to change your To
oil.reset
the CHGOIL SOONlight, see “CHG OILSOON Light,
How to Reset”in the Index. Also, see “OilLife
Monitor” in the Index.
Fuel Gage
Security Light
SECURITY
This light will come on
when you turn the key to
START and stay on until the
vehicle starts.
\
\
E
I
/
/
Your fuel gage tells you
about how muchfuel you
have left when the ignition
is on. Whenthe indicator
nears EMPTY (E), you still
have alittle he1 left, but
you should get more soon.
It will also comeon and stay onif your key is too
dirty or wet for the PASS-KeyI1 system to read the
resistor pellet.
If the resistor pelletis damaged or missing,the light
will flash.
If you’re driving andthe light comes on and remains on,
your PASS-Key I1 system is not working properly.
Your
vehicle is not protected by PASS-Key11, and you should
see your dealer.
Here are some things owners ask about. All these
situations are normal and do not show a problem with
your fuel gage:
0
At the service station, the pump may shut
off before
the gage readsFULL (F).
0
It takes a little more orless fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example,
the gage may have
indicated the tank was halffull, but it actually
took alittle more orless than half the tank’s
capacity to fill it.
0
The gage moves alittle when you turn a corner
or speed up.
2-61
b
2-62
NOTES
0 Section,3
ComfortControlsandAudioSystems
In this section, you’llfind out how to operatethe comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about
the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Ventilation Tips
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Setting the Clock for Systems with Automatic
Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo
3-8
3- 13
3- 17
3- 19
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-22
3 -22
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature(If Equipped)
Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna
3-1
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls
With these systems, you can control
the heating, cooling
and ventilationin your vehicle. The systems work best
if you keep your windows closed while using them.
Fan Knob
The right knob with the fan symbol selects the force
of
air you want. Toturn thefan off, turn the knobto “0.”
Temperature Control
If your system does not have the auxiliary temperature
control option, the center knob changes the temperature
of the air coming through the system. Turn this knob
toward red (to the right)for wanner air. Turn it toward
blue (to the left)for cooler air.
MAX
3-2
If your system does have the auxiliary temperature
control option, the center levers change the temperature
of the air coming through the system. The
DRIV
lever setsthe temperature for the driver and rear seat
passengers, and thePASS lever setsthe temperature
for the front seat passenger. For maximum defroster
performance, set theDRIV and PASS levers at
full warm.
Mode Knob
The left knob has several settings to control
the direction
of airflow. For eachsetting, set the temperature toa
comfortable setting.
MAX: This setting recirculates muchof the air inside
your vehicle and sends it through
the instrument panel
outlets. The air conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting unless
the outside
temperature is below 40°F (4.5"C). (Even when the
compressor is running, you can control the temperature.)
A/C: This setting bringsin outside air and directs
it through the instrument panel outlets.The air
conditioning compressor will run automatically
in
this setting unless theoutside temperature is below
40°F (4.5 "C). (Even when the compressor is running,
you can controlthe temperature.)
+e
[email protected] BI-LEVEL: This setting bringsin the outside
air and directsit two ways. Half of the air is directed
through the instrument panel outlets. Most
of the
remaining airis directed through the floor ducts and
a little to the defrost and side window vents. The air
conditioning compressor will run automatically in
this setting unless theoutside temperature is below
40°F (4.5"C). (Even when the compressor is running,
you can control the temperature.)
+a
fl
VENT: This setting brings in outside air and
directs it through the instrument panel outlets.
0
+HFLOOR: This setting sends mostof the air
through the ducts near the floor. The rest comes outof
the defrost and side window vents.
w.
+',
DEFOG: This setting allows halfof the air to
go to the floor ducts and half to the defrost and side
window vents. The air conditioning compressor will
run automaticallyin this setting unlessthe outside
temperature is below 40°F (4.5"C).(Even when the
compressor is running, you can control the temperature.)
DEFROST: This setting directs mostof the air
through the defrost andside window vents. Some of
the air goes tothe floor ducts. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting unless
the outside temperature is below
40°F (4.5"C).
(Even whenthe compressor is running, you can
control the temperature.)
3-3
Air Conditioning
On very hot days, open
the windows long enough to let
hot, insideair escape. This reduces the
A/C compressor
load, which should helpfuel economy.
For quick cool-down on very hot days, use MAX with
the temperature control allthe way in the blue area. If
this setting is used for long periods
of time, the air in
your vehicle may becometoo dry.
If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, you can use
it to help your system provide warmfaster
air when it’s
cold outside(0°F (-18°C) or lower). An engine coolant
heater warms the coolant your engine and heating
system uses to provide heat.See “Engine Coolarg
Heater” in the Index.
Ventilation System
For normal cooling on hot days, use A/C with the
temperature control in the blue area.
The system will
bring in outside air and cool
it.
On cool but sunny days, the sun may warm your
upper body, but your lower body may not be warm
enough. You can use BI-LEVEL with the temperature
control in the middle. The system will bringin outside
air and directit to your upper body, while sending
slightly warmed airto your lower body.You may
notice this temperature difference more at some times
than at others.
Heating
On cold days use FLOOR with the temperature control
all the way in the red area. The system will bring in
outside air, heatit and send it to the floor ducts.
Adjust the direction of airflow by movingthe vents.
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside airinto the vehicle whenit is moving. Outside
air will also enterthe vehicle when the air conditioning
fan is running.
Ventilation Tips
0
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENTto direct outside air
through your vehicle.
0
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction, suchas leaves. The heater and
defroster will workfar better, reducing the chance
of
fogging the inside of your windows.
0
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, set the
mode toFLOOR and the fan to the highest speedfor
a few moments before drivingoff. This helps clear
the intake ductsof snow and moisture and reduces
the chanceof fogging the inside of your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. Thishelps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Defogging and Defrosting
Your system has two settings
for clearing the front and
side windows. To defrost the windows quickly, use
DEFROST with the temperature knob(s)all the way in
the red area. To warm passengers while keeping
the
windows clean, use DEFOG.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger
uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear
window. Press the knob to
turn the defogger on.
It will turn itselfoff after about 10 minutes. If you turn
it on again,the defogger will only run for about
five
minutes before turningoff. You can also turnit off by
turning off the ignitionor pressing the button again.
Do not attach anythinglike a temporary vehicle license
or decal across the defogger grid.
3-5
I NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Setting the Clock for Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears.
Press and holdMN until the correct minute appears.
AM-FM Stereo
Audio Systems
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed
to operate easily and give years
of listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment
out of it if you
acquaint yourself withit first. Find out what your Delco
Electronics system can do and how to operate all its
controls, to be sure you’re getting the most
out of the
advanced engineering that went
into it.
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET.SET will appear onthe display for five
seconds. Withinfive seconds, press and hold the right
arrow on the SEEK button until
the correct minute
appears. Press and hold theleft arrow on the SEEK
button untilthe correct hour appears.
1
,396
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and
off and
controls the volume.To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob tothe right. Turnit to theleft to
decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio
is playing,
press this buttonto recall the station frequency.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch betweenAM
and FM. The display shows your selection.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and holdone of the four numbered buttons,
within five seconds. The sound will mute. Whenit
returns, releasethe button. Whenever you press that
numbered button, the station you set will return.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.
6 . Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
SEEK: Press the right orleft arrow togo to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.
SCAN: Press and holdone of the SEEK arrows;SCAN
will appear onthe display. Use SCAN to listen to
stations for a few seconds.The radio willgo to a station,
stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
The radio will scan upor down the radio band,
depending onthe arrow you pressed first. Press both
SEEK arrowsor the upper knobto stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttonslet
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (sevenAM and sevenFM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
In addition tothe four stations alreadyset, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttonsat the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear onthe display.)
3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same
time, within five seconds. The sound will mute.
When it returns, releasethe buttons. Whenever
you press the same buttons, the station you
set
will return.
4. Repeat the stepsfor each pair of pushbuttons.
3-7
Setting theTone
BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increaseor
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped)
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble.If a stationis weak or noisy, you
may want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to theleft or right speakers.The middle
position balances the sound between
the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knobto turn the system onand
off. To increase volume, turn the knob
to the right. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume.
The knob is capable of
rotating continuously.
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you pressthe button whenthe ignition is off,
the clock will show
for a few seconds.
3-8
SCV: Your system hasa feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make for
up road
and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control
ring behind the upper
knob to theright to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noiseat any particular speed.The volume
level should always soundthe same to youas you drive.
If you don’t want to use
SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the
control ring allowsfor
more volume compensationat faster vehicle speeds.
SCAN: Press oneof the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCANwill appear in the display. Use SCANto
listen to stations for a few seconds.The radio willgo to
a station, stop for a few seconds, thengo on to the next
station. PressSEEK again to stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this buttonto switch betweenAM, F M 1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turnit to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into
its stored
position when you’re not using
it.
SEEK: Press the rightor left arrow to go tothe
next higheror lower station. The sound will mute
while seeking.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
best suits the typeof station selected.
5. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons. The
sound will mute. Whenit returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numberedbutton, the
station you setwill return and theAUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will
also be
automatically selectedfor that button.
6. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM,six F M l and six FM2).Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3-9
-
‘1
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each
of your
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons
for a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each
of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored
for
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again tostop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever
the tuner
is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number(Pl-P6)
will appear momentarily
just before the frequencyis
displayed. InFM mode, this function will scan through
both FM1 and FM2 preset stations andFM1 or FM2
will appear on the display.
bass and treble equalization settings designed
for
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and
jazz
stations. C/W will appear on the display when you
fiist
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another
setting will appear on the display. Press
it again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display willgo
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and the AUTO TONE
display will go blank.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase bass and the
to left to
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank.
TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase treble and to the left to
decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak
or noisy,you may want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the right for the right speakers and to the
left
for the left speakers. The middle position balances
the
sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn
the knob to the rightto adjust the sound to the front
speakers and to the left
for the rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-10
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well
in this player. If
a tape is inserted when
the ignition is on but the radiois
off, the tape will begin playing. A tape symbol
is shown
in the center of the graphic display whenever a tape
is
inserted. When a tapeis active, the tape symbol will be
accompanied by a direction arrow.
While the tape is playing, usethe VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASSand TREB controlsjust as you
do for the radio. Other controls may have different
functions when a tapeis inserted. The display will show
the tape symbol and an arrow
to show which side of the
tape is playing.
If you hear nothing or hear just a garbled sound,it may
not be in squarely. Press EJECTto remove the tape and
start over.
The player is able to detect a tightor broken tape, and
will ejectthe tape. The radio will go back to playing
the
last station selected.
The player automatically senses the cassette
for metal or
Cr02 and sets the pre-emphasis. Anytime a tapeis
inserted, the top side is selected to playfirst.
PREV (1): Press this button or the
left SEEK arrow to
go tothe previous selectionon the tape if the current
selection has been playing
for less than eight seconds.
If the PREV buttonis pressed and the current selection
has been playingfor more than eight seconds, it will
go to the beginning of the current selection.Your tape
must have at least three seconds
of silence between each
selection for PREV or SEEK to work.The tape direction
arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation.
The
sound will mute during PREV
or SEEK operation. Press
this button orone of the SEEK arrows again to return to
normal play.
PROG (2): Press this button to play
the other sideof
the tape.
NEXT (3): Press this buttonor the right SEER arrow
to go to the next selection on the tape.
If you hold the
button or pressit more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through
the tape. Your tape
must have at least three seconds
of silence between
each selectionfor NEXT or SEEK to work.
The tape
direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation.
The sound will mute duringNEXT or SEEK operation.
Press this button orone of the SEEK arrows again to
return to normal play.
3-11
REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. cassette tape in the player while listening to the itradio,
Press it again to return
to playing speed. The radio will
may become warm.
play the last-selected station while the tape reverses.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. will
It still play tapes, but
00 (5): Press this button to reduce background noise.
you should clean itas soon as possible to prevent damage
Note that the double-D symbolwill appear on the display.
Dolby Noise Reductionis manufactured undera license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
to the tapes and player.See "Care of Your Cassette Tape
Player" in the Index. After you clean the player, press and
hold EJECT for five secondsto reset the CLN indicator.
The radio will display--- to show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
another partof the tape. Press the button again to return It is possible to usea CD adapter kit with your cassette
to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
station while the tape advances.
tape player.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when
a tape
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
is in the player.
1. Turn the ignition to RUNor ACCESSORY
TAPE AUX: Press this buttonto change to the tape
function when the radiois on. The tape symbol with an 2. Turn the radio off.
arrow will appear on the display when the tape
is active.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button
for five
If your systemis equipped witha remote playback
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will
flash
device, pressing this buttona second time will allow the
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
remote device to play.
4. Insert the adapter.It will power up the radio and
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
begin playing.
will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the
is pressed.
radio off if this buttonis pressed first. If you leave a
F W D (6): Press this button to advance quickly to
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped)
and wind noise as you drive.Set the volume atthe
desired level. Move the control ring behind
the upper
knob to the right to adjust
the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume,as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don't want to use SCV,turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows
for
more volume compensationat faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
Playing 'the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob toturn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turnthe knob to the right. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume,The knob is capable of
rotating continuously.
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you pressthe button when the ignitionis off,
the clock will showfor a few seconds.
SCV: Your system has afeature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV,yow
audio system adjusts automatically to make for
uproad
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between
AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly
so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations.Push the knob backinto its stored
position whenyou're not using it.
SEEK: Press the right orleft arrow togo to the
next higher or lower station.
The sound will mute
while seeking.
SCAN: Press oneof the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appearon the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stationsfor a few seconds.The radio will go to
a station, stopfor a few seconds, then
go on to the next
station. PressSEEK again to stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you returnto your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, sixF M 1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to selectthe equalization that
best suits the type
of station selected.
P.SCAN or oneof the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner
is in the P.SCAN mode.The channel number (Pl-P6)
will appear momentarily
just before the frequency is
displayed. InFM mode, this function will scan through
both F M 1 and FM2 preset stations andF M 1 or FM2
will appear on the display.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly
so it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase bass and to the left to
5. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons.
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio's
The sound will mute. Whenit returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button, AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
the station you set will return and the AUTO TONEAUTO TONE display will go blank.
equalization that you selected will
also be
TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
automatically selected for that button.
knob to the right to increase treble and to the left to
decrease treble. Whenyou use this control, the radio's
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each
of your
AUTO TONE display willgo blank. If a stationis
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons
for a few
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
seconds. The radiowill scan through eachof the stations
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
vou're not using them.
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored
for
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
3-14
AUTO TONE: This feature allows youto choose preset
bass andtreble equalization settings designedfor
countqdwestern, classical, news, rock, pop and
jazz
stations. C/W will appear on
the display when youfirst
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another
setting will appear on
the display. Press it again after
JAZZ appears andthe AUTO TONE display willgo
blank. Tone control will return the
to BASS and TREB
knobs. Also,if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and
the AUTO TONE
display will go blank.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob tothe right for the right speakers andto the left for
the left speakers. The middle position balancesthe
sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to adjust
the sound to thefront
speakers and tothe left for the rear speakers. The middle
position balancesthe sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back
into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into
the slot, label side up. The
player will pullit in. The disc should begin playing.The
display will show CD and the CD symbol. If you want
to insert a compact disc with
the ignition off,first press
RECALL or EJECT.
If you’re driving on a very rough road
or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play andERR (error) may appear on
the display. Press RECALL to take
ERR off the display.
When things get back to normal, the disc should play.
If the disc comes out,
it could be that:
0
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous track
if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds.If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing
for
more than eight seconds, it will go the
to beginning of
the current selection.If you hold the button or pressit
more than once,the player will continue moving back
through the disc.The sound will mute while seeking.
3-15
I
RDM (2): Press this buttonto hear the tracksin random,
rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM will show on
the display.Press RDM again to turnoff random play.
RDM is reset to off when the disc is ejected.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the rightSEEK arrow
to go to the next track. If you hold
the button or press
it more than once, the player will continue moving
forward through the disc. The sound will mute
while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. Releaseit to play the passage. You can
use the counter reading onthe display to locate a
passage more easily.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player.The letters CD will gooff the display.
CD AUX: Press this button to change
to the disc
function when the radiois on. A CD icon will appear
on the display whenthe disc is in the player, whether
it is active or not.If your systemis equipped with a
remote playback device, pressingthis button a second
time will allowthe remote device to play.
EJECR Press this button to remove the disc. The radio
will play.The disc will start at
the first track when you
reinsert it.
If you turn off the ignitionor radio with a disc
in
the player, it will stayin the player. When youturn
on the ignition or system, the
disc will start playing
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance
quickly within a track. Release
it to resume playing.
where it was stopped. If you press EJECT but don't
You can use the counter reading on the display to locateremove the disc,the player will pullthe disc back into
a passage easily.
protect it after about one minute. If you leave a compact
disc in the player while listening to the radio,
it may
RECALL: Press this button to see which track
is
become warm.
playing. Press it again within five seconds tosee how
long it has been playing (elapsed time). The track
number also appears whenyou change the volume or
when a new track starts to play.
3-16
I
Theft-Deterrent Feature(If Equipped)
1. Write down any threeor four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keepit in a safe place separate
from the vehicle.
THEFTLOCK' is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
functions whenever battery power
is removed. Your
audio systemis equipped with THEFTLOCK if
3. Turn the radio off.
THEFTLOCK is displayed on the front of the radio.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
until --- shows on the display. Next you will the
use
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
secret code number which you have written down.
radio is not protected bythe feature. If THEFTLOCK
5 . Press MN and000 will appear on the display.
is activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
6. Press MN again to make thelast two digits agree
When THEFTLOCKis activated, the radio will display
with your code.
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted.
If your battery loses power
7. Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree
for any reason, you must unlock
the radio withthe
with your code.
secret code beforeit will operate.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have written down.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The display will showREP to let you know that you
The instructions which follow explain how enter
to your
need to repeatSteps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
secret code.
recommended that you read through all nine steps
9. Press AM-FM and this timethe display will show
before startingthe procedure.
SEC tolet you know that your radio is secure. The
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
between any steps,the radio automatically revertsto
when the ignition is turned off.
time and you muststart the procedure overat Step 4.
3-17
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORYor RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
15 seconds between steps:
until SEC shows on the display.
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
2. Press MN and000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
3. Press MN again to makethe last two digits agree
with your code.
with your code.
6 . Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
code matchesthe secret code you have written down.
The display will show---,indicating that the radio
is
The display will showSEC, indicating the radio is
no longer secured.
now operable and secure.
If the code entered is incorrect,SEC will appear on the
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
appear on the display.
You will have to wait an hour
code is entered.
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
secured radio,the radio won’t turn on and
LOC will
correct code beforeINOP appears.
appear on the display.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code follows;
as
pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
3-18
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power
Loss” earlier
in this section.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
(If Equipped)
VOLUME: Press the upor
down arrow to increase or
decrease volume.
If your vehicle has thisfeature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.
SEEK: Press the up arrow
to tune to the next radio
station and the down
arrow to tuneto the
previous radio station.
PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
compact disc whenthe radio is playing.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press
it again to turn onthe sound.
If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing,
the player
will advance with the up arrow and rewind with the
down arrow.
Understanding Radio Reception
PRESET Press this button to play a station you have
programmed onthe radio preset buttons.
AM-FM: Press this button to chooseAM,FM1 or FM2.
If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing,
it will stop
and the radio will play.
The range for most AM stations is greater than
for FM,
especially at night.The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other.
AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noiseif you ever get it.
AM
3-19
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere withFM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sureyou can
Tips About Your Audio System
add whatyou want. If you can, it’s very
important to do properly.
it
Added sound
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late.Your hearing can adapt to higher
equipment may interfere with the operationof
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radioor
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
other systems, and even damage them. Your
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
operation of sound equipment that has
been
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment,check with
0 Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
0 Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
covering mobile radio and telephone
units.
and clearly.
3-20
--
--
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that
is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat.If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may causefailure of the tape player.
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection
feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape.
To
prevent the cleaning cassettefrom being ejected, use the
following steps.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 2. Turn the radio off.
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate 3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX buttonfor five
that you have used your tape player
for 50 hours without
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
resetting the tape clean timer.
If this message appears on
for two seconds.
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
recommended cleaning time.
known good cassetteto see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
The recommended cleaning methodfor your cassette
cleaner which uses a cassette withfabric
a
belt to clean
tape player isthe use of a scrubbing action,
the
tape
head.
This
type
of
cleaning
cassette
will not
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
eject onits own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
the tape head as the hubs
of the cleanercassette turn.
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The recommended cleaning cassetteis available through
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
cassette is not recommended.
3-21
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to resetthe CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and
the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs
is not advised, due to
the riskof contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged.If the mast should ever become
Care of Your Compact Discs
slightly bent, you can straighten
it out by hand. If the
Handle discs carefully.Store them in their original cases mast is badly bent, as
it might be by vandals, you should
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight replace it.
and dust.If the surfaceof a discis soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution Check every oncein a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender.
and cleanit, wiping from the centerto the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
I
3-22
i
b
NOTES
3-23
@% NOTES
3-24
rfir
Section 4 Your Driving and theRoad
Here you’ll find information about driving
on different kinds of roads andin varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-2
4-5
4-6
4-10
4- 12
4- 12
4- 13
4- 15
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
4- 16
4- 19
4-20
4-2 1
4-2 1
4-22
4-24
4-28
4-30
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
4-1
Defensive drivingredly means “be ready far anything.”
On city stxeets,rural roads or freeways,it means
“always expectthe unexpected.”
Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they
might do. Be readyfor their mistakes,
Rear-end collisions are about the. most preventable
of
accidents. Yet they arecomman. Allow enough
following distance.It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city andrural driving. You never
know when the vehiclein front of you is going to
brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can
give about drivingis:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety devicein your
Chevrolet: Buckleup. (See “Safety Belts”in the Index.)
4-2
Defensive driving requires that
a driver concentrate OR
the driving task. Anythingthat distracts from the driving
task - such as concentrating on a cellular telephone
call, reading, or reachmg for something on the
floor makes proper defensive driving-moreMicult
and can even cause
a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help dothings like h i s , or pull
off the road ina safe place to do them yoursel€.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
--
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s
the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousandsof victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
driver plans todrive? It’s alot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affectsfour things that anyone needs
to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC)
of someone
who is drinking depends uponfour things:
Drunken Driving
Judgment
The amount of alcohol consumed
MuscularCoordination
The drinker’s body weight
0
Vision
0
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half
of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths arethe result of someone who was drinking
and driving.In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated withthe use
of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
the
Many adults-- by some estimates, nearly half
adult population-- choose never todrink alcohol, so
they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21,
it’s against the lawin every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasonsfor these laws.
0
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
0
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120
ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinksif each had 1- 1/2 ounces
(45 ml)of a liquor like whiskey, gin
or vodka.
4-3
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The lawin many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number
of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limitis 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower.
The BAC limitfor all
commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over
0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour).
Of course, as we’ve seen,it
depends on how much alcohol
is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drankthree double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to
0.12 percent. A person who
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have’
a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too.
Women generally have
a lower relative percentage
of body water than men.
Since alcoholis carried in body water, this means that a
4-4’
But the ability to driveis affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills
of many people areimpaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a
collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC
of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
0.06
of
percent has doubledhis or her chance
of having a collision. At a BAC
level of 0.10 percent, the
chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater;
at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself
of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t
the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child
darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate
BAC might not beable
to react quickly enough to avoid
the collision.
There’s somethingelse about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries
worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cordor
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chanceof being killedor permanently disabled
is higher than ifthe person had not been drinking.
Drinking and then drivingis very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness
and
judgment can be affected by evena small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’tdrink and drive or ride with adriver
who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab;or if
you’re with a group, designate driver
a
who will
not drink.
--
--
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. Theyare the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems haveto do their work
at the places wherethe tires meetthe road.
4-5
Average reaction timeis about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average.It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part.
So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in
314 of a second, a vehicle
travels 66 feet (20 m).
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h)
That could be lot
a of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the conditionof the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the conditionof your brakes;the weight of the
vehicle and the amountof brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
easy to ask moreof those control systems than the tires braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
and road can provide. That means you can lose controlis a mistake.Your brakes may not have time to cool
of your vehicle.
between hard stops.Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lotof heavy braking.If you keep pace
Braking
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot
of unnecessary braking. That
Braking action involvesperception
time andreaction time.
means better braking and longer brake life.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and doit. That’s reaction time.
4-6
If your engineever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If youdo, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you willstill have some power brake assist. But
you will useit when you brake. Once the power assist
is used up,it may take longer tostop and the brake
pedal will be harder to push.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes,
the brake pedal
will say so.
ANTI LOCK
And this warninglight on
the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
you
start your vehicle.
Anti-Lock Brakes (Option)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is
an advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will
check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this testis going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves or pulseslittle.
a This is normal.
If there’s a problem withthe anti-lock brake system,the
anti-lock brake system warning light will stayoron
flash. See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light”
in
the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could.
The computer is
programmed to make the most
of available tire and
road conditions.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s saythe road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal
jumps out in
front of you.
You slam onthe brakes. Here’s what happens with
ABS.
A computer senses that wheelsare slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-8
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get yourfoot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance.If you get too close tothe vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave
enough roomup ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pumpthe brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly andlet anti-lock workfor you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but
this is normal.
LOW
TRAC
When your anti-lock system
is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid,
this light will come on.
See
“Anti-Lock Brake System
Active Light” in the Index.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake
at the
same time. However,if you don’t have anti-lock, your
first reaction -- to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
it
down -- may be the wrong thing todo. Your wheels can
stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can’t respond to
your steering. Momentum will carry
it in whatever
direction it was headed when the wheels stopped rolling.
That could be offthe road, into the very thing you were
trying to avoid, orinto traffic.
If you don’t have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control.You do thisby pushing on
the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze
the brakes hard without locking the wheels.
If you
hear orfeel the wheels sliding, easeoff the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. (If you
do
have anti-lock, it’s different:see “Anti-Lock Brakes”
in the Index.)
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
4-9
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system
is not functioning,you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves
at a reasonable speed.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems -- steering and braking-- have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you’re steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two
control systems -- steering and acceleration-- can
overwhelm those places wherethe tires meet the road
and make youlose control.
up on
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on What should youdo if this ever happens? Ease
the
brake
or
accelerator
pedal,
steer
the
vehicle
the way
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
you want it to go, and slow down.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of isussubject to
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
the same lawsof physics when driving on curves. The
adjust
your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are
traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction.If you’ve ever
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
tried to steer a vehicle on wet
ice, you’ll understand this.
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while front
your
wheels are straight ahead.
The traction you can getin a curve depends on the
condition of your tires andthe road surface, the angle
Try to adjust your speedso you can “drive” through the
at which the curveis banked, and your speed.
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
While you’re in a curve, speed
is the one factor you
accelerate untilyou are out ofthe curve, and then
can control.
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
I
‘I
I’
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering canbe more effective
than braking. For example, you come over
hilla and
find a truck stoppedin your lane, or acar suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops rightin front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking-- if you canstop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the timefor evasive action-- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes-- but, unless you have
anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels. (See
“Braking in Emergencies” earlier in this section.)
It is
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
better to remove as much speedas you can from a
quick decision.If you are holding the steering wheel at
possible collision. Then steer around the problem,
to the
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
left or right dependingon the space available.
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations
are always
possible isa good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder
while you’re driving.
The driverof a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waitsfor just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again.A simple maneuver?
OFF-ROAD RECOVE
/
/
P
F*-LEFT APPROX.
QUARTERTURN
edge of paved surte~e
If the levelof the shoulder is only slightly below the
off the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down
the roadway.
4-12
I,
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since
the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane
as oncoming
traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can
suddenly put the passing driver
face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents-- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips
for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might aEect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
Watch for trafEc signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can seea sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken
center line usually indicates it’s
all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the laneor a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
IL
0
0
0
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area
of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
of the right lane to pass. When you are
far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle tosee its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back intothe right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror
is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seemto be farther awayfrom you
than it really is.)
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to acceleratebut stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your moveso you will be
increasing speed asthe time comesto move into the
other lane. If the way
is clear to pass, you will have
a “running start” that more than makesfor
upthe
distance you would lose by dropping back. Andif
something happensto cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and
drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But takecare that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
Check your mirrors,glance over your shoulder, and
start yourleft lane change signal before moving out
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
0
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following
driver to get aheadof you. Perhaps you can easea
little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meetthe road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t giveup. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
4-13
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your bestto avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
those conditions. Butskids are always possible.
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
The three typesof skids correspond to your vehicle’s
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels to slide. You may not realize the surfaceis slippery until
aren’t rolling. Inthe steering or cornering skid,
too
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
much speed or steeringin a curve causes tires to slip and clues such as enough water,
ice or packed snow on
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too
the road to make a “mirrored surface”
-- and slow down
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid and
an acceleration skid are best
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember:
handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
It helps avoid onlythe braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then ina braking skid (where the wheelsare
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foottheoff
no longer rolling), release enough pressure the
on brakes
accelerator pedal and quickly steer way
the you wantthe
to
get
the
wheels
rolling
again.
This
restores
steering
vehicle to go.If you start steering quickly enough, your
control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when
you
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a
have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are rolling,
second skid ifit occurs.
you will have steering control.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road.
For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
--
4-14
Driving at Night
0
Don’t drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
0
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your
headlamps can light up only
so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watch for animals.
0
If you’re tired, pulloff the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as
in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much lightsee
to the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some
drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, orby fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drivedefensively.
What you do inthe daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example,if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make
lota
of things invisible.
4-15
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams,
or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
ing in Ra and onWet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night
is made much
worse by dirt on theglass. Even the insideof the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less
of a
roadway when youare in a turnor curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects.Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularlyfor proper aim,so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability tosee in dim light-- and
aren’t even awareof it.
4-16
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or
turn as well because
dry roads.
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts tofall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving ondry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder
it is to see. Evenif your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge
of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment
in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips
of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving toofast through large water puddlesor even
going through somecar washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try
to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
Wet brakes can causeaccidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stopand may cause pullingto
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving througha large puddleof water or
a car wash, apply your brakepedal lightly until
your brakes worknormally.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous.So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little orno contact with the road.
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
in through your
standing water, water can come
engine’s air intake and badly damage
your
engine. Never drive through water that
is slightly
lower than the underbody
of your vehicle.If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But
it can if your
tires do not have much tread iforthe pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen iflot
a of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when
it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
4-18
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety
in city driving:
0
Know the best wayto get to where youare
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an
unknown partof the cityjust as you wouldfor a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’llsave time and energy.
(See the nextpart, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there becausethe corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and
just before you
start to move, check both ways
for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersectionor may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want
to watch out for
what the other driversare doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-19
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
the to
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow.Try to merge into the gap at close
to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing
rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over
your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle
in your “blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways(also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikesor superhighways) arethe safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep tothe right. Drive atthe same
speed mostof the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-20
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you wantto leave the freeway, move
to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do
not, under any circumstances,stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
e Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not e Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for
to your sense of motion. After drivingfor any distance
long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the
at higher speeds, you may tend
to think you are going
The ex11 speea 1s usually posted.
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
recommended pressure?
e WeatherForecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re notfresh -- such as after a day’s
e Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
work -- don’t planto make too many miles that
first part
of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you Highway Hypnosis
can easily drive in.
Is there actually such a conditionas “highway
Is your vehicle readyfor a longtrip? If you keep it
hypnosis”? Oris it justplain falling asleep at the
serviced and maintained, it’s ready go.
to If it needs
wheel? Callit highway hypnosis, lackof awareness,
service, haveit done before starting out.Of course,
or whatever.
you’ll find experienced and able service experts
in
of road with
Chevrolet dealerships all across North America. They’ll There is something about an easy stretch
the
same
scenery,
along
with
the
hum
of
the
tires on the
be ready and willing to help
if you needit.
road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind
Here are some things you
can check before a trip:
against the vehicle that
can make you sleepy. Don’t let
it happen to you!If it does, your vehicle can leave
0 Windshield Washer FZuid: Is the reservoir full? Are
the road in less than a second, and you could crash
all windows clean inside and outside?
and be injured.
0 Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
aware thatit can happen.
all levels?
4-21
ips:
someare here
Then
0
Make sure your vehicleis well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
0
Keep your eyes moving.Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
0
If you get sleepy, pull
off the road into a rest, service
or parking area andtake a nap, get some exercise,
or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway
as
an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains
is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-22
If you drive regularly in steep country, orif you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0
--
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check allfluid
levels andalso the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard
on
mountain roads.
Coasting downhillin NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will
have to do all the work
of slowing down. They
could get so hot thatthey wouldn’t work well.
or even none
You would then have poor braking
going down a hill. You could crash.Always have
your enginerunning and yourvehicle in gear
when you godownhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your enginedo some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go
down asteep or long hill.
I
If you don’t shift down, your brakescould get so
hot thatthey wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor brakingor even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakes ona steep downhillslope.
0
0
0
0
Knowhowto go uphill. Youmaywant to shift down
to a lowerg e i The lower gearshelp cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
Stay in your ownlane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Driveat speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top
of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane,
like a stalledcar or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-23
Winter Driving
Here are some tipsfor winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
4-24
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply
of windshield washer fluid,a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth anda
couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet ora couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to
drive on. But wet
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the ice can be even more trouble because
it may offerthe
road probably have good traction.
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0”C) and freezing rain begins fall.
to
However, if there is snow or
ice between your tires
Try
to
avoid
driving
on
wet
ice
until
salt
and
sand
crews
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
can get there.
You’ll have alot less traction or “grip” and will need
to be very careful.
Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow-- drive with caution. Accelerate gently.
Try not to break thefragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish
the surface
under the tires even more.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to brake very gently, too. (If you
do have anti-lock,
see “Anti-Lock” in the Index.This system improves
your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking
system or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes,
if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to
get the most traction you can.
1
4-25
IfYousre Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be
in a
serious situation.You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know
for sure that youare near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here
are some
things to do to summon helpand keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
0
4-26
Turn on your hazard flashers.
0
Tie a red clothto your vehicle toalert police that
you’ve been stopped by
the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blanketsor extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself
or
tuck under your clothingto keep warm.
Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside.CO could overcome youand kill
you. You can’t seeit or smell it, so
you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time tosure
be snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a windowjust a littleon the sideof the
vehicle that’s away fromthe wind. This will help
keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-27
Loading Your Vehicle
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
I
'I,
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properlycarry. The Tire-Loading Infurnation label
is inside the tmnk lid The label tells you the proper size,
speed rating and reconmended inflation pressures for
the tires on your vehicle. It dso gives youimportant
inforanaton.ahout the number of people that can be in
your vehicle and the total weight you can carry. This
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
nanfactory-installed options.
4-28
DATE
MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP
GVWR
GAWR FRT
If you do have a heavy load, spread
it out. Don’t carry
more than 167 pounds (75 kg) in your trunk.
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALLr r l ’
Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than
the GVWR, or either the maximumfront or
rear GAWR. If you do,parts on your vehicle
can break,or it can change theway your
vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose
control. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.
The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edgeof the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacityof your vehicle, calledthe GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceedthe GVWR for your vehicleor the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
for either the front or
rear axle.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not coverparts or
components that fail becauseof overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle
-- like suitcases,
tools, packages or anything
else -- they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-29
Towing a Trailer
put inside yourvehicle can strike
and injurepeople in a sudden stopor turn, or
in a crash.
Put things in the trunkof your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward
as you can.
Try to spread theweight evenly.
Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,
inside thevehicle so that some of them are
above the tops
of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the traileris too heavy,
the brakesmay not workwell or even at all.
You and your passengers could be
seriously
injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the
resulting repairswould not be coveredby your
warranty. Pull atrailer only if you have followed
all the steps in this
section. Ask your dealer for
advice and information about towing
a trailer
with yourvehicle.
--
Your vehicle can tow a trailer itifis equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment.
To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is
for your vehicle, you
should read the informationin “Weight of the Trailer’’
that appears laterin this section. But trailering
is
different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changesin handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
4-30
That’s the reasonfor this part. Init are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rues.
Many of these are important for your safety and that
of
your passengers.So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
0
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over
50 mph (80 kmk)and
don’t make starts atfull throttle. This helps your
engine and other partsof your vehicle wearin at the
heavier loads.
0 Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Load-pulling components suchas the engine, transaxle,
Don’t drivefaster than the maximum posted speed
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
for trailers (or no more than
55 mph (90 M))
to
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the
Three important considerations have do
to with weight:
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
0 the weight of the trailer,
the pulling requirements.
the weight of the trailer tongue
If You DoDecide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
0
0
0
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
There are many different laws, including speed limit Weight of the Trailer
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving.A good sourcefor this
1,000 lbs. (450 kg).
It should never weigh more than
information can bestate or provincial police.
But even that can be
too heavy.
Consider using a sway control.
You can ask a hitch
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
dealer about sway controls.
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle
is used to
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the
first 1,000 miles
pull
a
trailer
are
all
important.
And,
it
can
also depend
(1 600 km) your new vehicleis driven. Your engine,
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
axle or other parts could be damaged.
4-31
You can ask your dealerfor our trailering information or
advice, or youcan write us at:
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioLlH 8P7
A
B
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load(A) of any traileris an important
weight to measure becauseit affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle.The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight
of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carryin it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-32
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight(B). If you havea weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue(A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight
(B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may beable to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weighton Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires
are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’llfind these numberson the
Tire-Loading Informationlabel (found insidethe trunk
lid) or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Then be
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weightof the trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under
the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road
if it becomes separatedfrom the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided
by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slackso you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag
on the ground.
Hitches
It’s importantto have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going
by and rough roadsare
a few reasons why you’ll need
the right hitch. Here are
some rulesto follow:
The rear bumper on your vehicleis not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches toit. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach the
to bumper.
0
Will you have to make any holesin the body of your
vehicle when youinstall a trailer hitch?If you do,
then be sureto seal the holeslater when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO)from your exhaustcan get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt
and water can, too.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer haveits own brakes? Be sure to
read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakes
so you’ll beable to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
0
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes,do not try to tap
into your vehicle’s brake system.If you do, both
brake systems won’t work well, or
at all.
0
Even if your vehicle doesn’t have anti-lock brakes,
don’t tapinto your vehicle’s brake system if the
trailer’s brake system will use more than
0.02 cubic
inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master
cylinder. If it does, both braking systems won’t
work well. You could evenlose your brakes.
0
0
Will the trailer brake parts take
3,000 psi (20 650 P a )
of pressure? If not, thetrailer brake system must not
be used with your vehicle.
If everything checks out
this far, then make the brake
fluid tap atthe upper rear master cylinder port. But
don’t use copper tubingfor this. If you do,it will
bend and breakoff. Use steel brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Stay at least twiceas far behind the vehicle aheadas you
would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll needto go much farther beyondthe
passed vehicle before you can
return to your lane.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount
of experience.
Before setting outfor the open road, you’ll want
to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with
the feel of
Backing Up
handling and braking withthe added weightof the
trailer. And always keepin mind that the vehicle you are Hold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand.
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
Then, to move the trailer to the left,
just move that hand
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
possible, have someone guide you.
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.
If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working.This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
I
4-34
Making n r n s
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash
for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they
are not.
It’s important to check occasionallyto be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start
down along or steep downgrade.If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes
so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
Thrn Signals When Towinga Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasherandor extra wiring. Check
with your Chevrolet dealer.The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn
or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps
will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
If you are towing a trailer, you may prefer to drive
in
DRIVE (D) insteadof AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(or, as you needto, a lowergear).
(a)
4-35
Parking on Hills
0
Shift into a gear: and
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
0
Release the parking brake.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes untilthe chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift PARK
to
(P).
5 . Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
4-36
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clearof the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule
for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle
fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake
adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and
the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea
to review this information
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions.See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
0 Section 5
Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occuron the road.
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-14
5-17
Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
Cooling System
5-26
5-26
5-38
5-39
If a TireGoes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
.3
......
.......
......
Press the switch (located near the ignition switch)
to
make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and
off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your keyis in, and even if the keyisn't in.
To turn off the flashers, press the switch again. When
the hazard warning flashersare on, your turn signals
won't work.
Your hazard warning flashers
let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem.Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will
flash on andoff.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set
one up at
the side of the road about300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicleand some jumper cables tostart your
vehicle. But please followthe steps below todo it safely.
A CAUTION:
Batteries canhurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
They contain acidthat can burn you.
They contain gasthat can explode or ignite.
They contain enough electricity toburn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all
of these things canhurt you.
L
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result
in costly damage
to your vehiclethat wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Trying tostart your vehicle by pushing
or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
I NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If theyare, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want.You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, andthe bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
5-3
To avoid the possibilityof the vehicles rolling,set
the parking brakefirmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure.Put your automatic
transaxle in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Turn off all
lamps that aren’t neededas well as radios. This will
avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. Andit
could save your radio!
ir
” ’
NOTICE:
I
If you leave your radio on,
it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. (Your
vehicle’s batteryis located under the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.)
’A
I
CAUTION:
-
I
An electric fancan start up even when the engineis
not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing
and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.
5-4
I
5. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.Your vehicle hasa remote positive(+)
jump starting terminal. The terminalis on the same
side of the engine compartment as your battery. The
remote positive(+) terminal is located near the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.You should
always use the remote positive
(+) terminal instead
of the positive(+) terminal on your battery.To
uncover the remote positive(+) terminal, lift the red
plastic cap.
6. Check thatthe jumper cables don’t haveloose or
missing insulation.If they do, you couldget a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
~
Using a matchnear a battery can causebattery
gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use
a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need toadd water to theACDelco [email protected]
battery installed in everynew GM vehicle. But if
a battery has fiier caps, besure the right amount
of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acidthat can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally getit in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive
(+) will
go to positive (+) and negative(-) will go to a
metal engine part. Don’t connect positive
(+) to
negative (-), or you’ll get a short that would
damage the battery and maybe other parts, too.
I
Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you
badly. Keepyour handsaway from movingparts
once the engine is running.
5-5
8. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connectit
to the positive(+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Connect the red positive(+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the otherend touch anything until the next
step. The other endof the negative cabledoesn ’t go
to the dead battery.
It goes to a heavy, unpainted, metal part
on the
engine of the vehicle withthe dead battery.
10. Attach the cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that
move. The electrical connection isjust as good
there, but the chanceof sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the enginefor a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.If it
won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to havea dealer or a professional towing service
tow your vehicle.
If your vehicle has been changed
or modified sinceit
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog
lamps, aero skirting,or special tires and wheels, these
instructions and illustrations may not be correct.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When youcall, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle cannotbe towed from the front or
rear with sling-type equipment.
That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.
0 The make, model and yearof your vehicle.
0 Whether you can still move the shift lever.
0 If there was an accident, what was damaged.
When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator
know thatthis manual contains detailed towing
instructions and illustrations.The operator may want to
see them.
0
A. Heavy Metal EnginePart
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-8
A CAUTION:
To help avoidinjury to you or others:
0 Never let passengersride in a vehiclethat is
being towed.
0 Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
0 Never tow with damagedparts not
fully secured.
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted bythe tow truck.
Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towing it.
Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
5-9
your vehicle is ’being towed, have the [email protected]
1When
turned to the OFF pusition, The steering wheel should
A vehicle can fall from a car carrier
if it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause collision,
a
serious personal injury and
vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains
or
steel cables before it is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cutby sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Alwaysuse
T-hooks inserted in theT-hook slots. Never use
J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.
5-10
be clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping
device designedfor tawing service. Do not use the
vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transaxle
should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking
brake released.
I NOTICE:
Don’t have yourvehicle towed on the drive
wheels, unless you must. If the vehicle must be
towed on the drivewheels, do nottow the vehicle
more than500 cumulative miles (800 km) or
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Cumulative miles are
defined as totalmiles over the life of the vehicle.
For example, yourvehicle cannot be towed
500 miles (800 km) eachday of a trip totaling
3,000 miles (4800 km).If these limitations must
be exceeded, then the drivewheels have tobe
supported on adolly.
Front Towing
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipmentor
fascidfog lamp damagewill occur. Use wheel-lift
or carcarrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier
equipment. Use
safety chainsand wheel straps. Use the T-slots for
carcarrier securing.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
vehicle
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from
to ground or
vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To
help avoid damage, raisethe vehicle until
adequate clearanceis obtained between the
ground and/or wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to
suspension componentswhen using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.
5-11
Attach T-hook chains in
front of the wheels, into the
side slotsof the cradle, on
bothsides.
Rear Towing
A towing dolly must be used under the drive wheels
when towingfiom the reax
These slotsare to be used when loading or securing to
car-carrier equipment.
Attach a separate
safety chain around the
outboard endof each
lower controlarm.
1.
5-12
i
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipmentor the rear
bumper valance will be damaged.Use wheel-lift
or car-carrierequipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use
safety chainsand wheel straps. Use the T-slots for
car-carrier securing.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage
a vehicle. Damage can occur fromvehicle to
ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help
avoid damage,install a towing dolly and raise the
vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained
between the groundand/or wheel-lift equipment,
Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to
suspension componentswhen using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.
Attach T-hook chains into
of
the slots in the bottom
the floor pansupport rails,
just ahead of the rear
to
These slots are to be used when loading and securing
car-carrier equipment.
Attach a separate safety
chain around the outboard
end of both lateralarms.
5-13
Engine Overheating
I NOTICE:
I
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating made, to,avuid engine damas%allow
the engineto cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil win be severely degradedc Repair
the muse o€coolant loss and change the otl. See
“Engine Oil, When to Change” in theIndex.
5-14
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam froman overheated engine canburn you
badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away
coming
from the engineif you see or hear steam
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is RO sign of steam or coolant beforeyou
open thehood.
If’you keep driving whenyour engine is overheated,
the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could
be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catchesfire because you keep
driving with no coolant, yourvehicle can be
badly damaged. Thecostly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. If your vehicle has the
3100 engine, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” in theIndex.
5-15
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just tobe safe, drive slowerfor about 10 minutes.
If you get the overheat warning but
see or hear no
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes drive normally.
the engine can geta little too hot when you:
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
vehicle right away.
Stop after high-speed driving.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign
of steam,
try thisfor a minute or so:
1. Turn off your air conditioner.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL(N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (a).
5-16
for two or three minutes while you’re parked, see
to if
the warning stops. But then,if you still have the
warning, turn offthe engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down. If your vehicle has the
3 100 engine, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
3800 (Code K) Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Reservoir
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
3100 (Code M) Engine
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
A. Coolant Recovery Reservoir
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-17
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else untilit cools down.
I=
The coolant level should be
at or above theCOLD mark
on a cold engine. The coolant level should be at or
above the HOT mark on a hot engine.
If it isn’t, you may have a leak
in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else
in
the cooling system.
I
5-18
A CAUTION:
Heater
and radia
,andother engine
parts, can bevery hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run theengine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire,and you could be burned.
Get any leakfixed before you drive thevehicle.
I NOTICE:
Engine damageif you keep running yourengine
without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, the
butcoolant level
isn’t at the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean
water (preferably distilled) andDEX-COOL’ engine
coolant atthe coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Indexfor more information.)
Adding only plainwater to yourcooling systemcan
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like
alcohol, can boil beforethe propercoolant mixture
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set
for the propercoolant
With plain water or
the wrong m
x
iture,your engine could get toohot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your
engine couldcatch fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
DEX-COOL’ ~oolant.
wil.
mixture.
If there seems to be no
leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the
engine is overheating, bothfans should be running.If
they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
5-19
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolantand the proper
coolant mixture.
You can beburned if you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol
and itwill burn if the engineparts arehot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank
is at the
COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you cantry. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but
be sure the cooling
system is cool before youdo it.
5-20
A CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blowout and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little they can come out
at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the
cooling system, includingthe radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling systemand
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto
turn the pressure cap.
--
--
5-21
Then keep turning
the pressure cap, but
now push down as you
turn it. Remove the
pressure cap.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
LOTICE:
Your engine has aspecific radiator fill procedure.
Failure tofollow this procedurecould cause your
engine to overheatand beseverely damaged.
-
1. You can remove the
radiator pressure cap
when the cooling
system, including the
radiator pressure capand
upper radiator hose,is
no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down whileturning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that
to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure
left.
5-22
L
-
You can beburned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engineparts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
3. After the engine cools, open thecoolant air b L a
valve or valves.
1
3800 V6 (VIN Code K):
There is one bleed valve.
It is located on the
thermostat housing.
.....
3 100 V6 (VIN Code M): There are two bleed valves.
One is located on the thermostat housing. The
othef is
located on the thermostat bypass tube.
5-23
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air bleed
valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the valves after
the radiator is filled.
6. Then fill the coolant recovery tankto the
COLD mark.
7. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the pressure cap
off.
8. Start the engine andlet it run until you canfeel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch
out for the
engine cooling fans.
10. Then replacethe pressure cap.At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow
out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up
like this.
9. By this tirne, the coolantlevel inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower.If the levelis lower, add
more of the proper [email protected] coolant mixture
through thefiller neck until the level reaches
the
base of the filler neck.
11. Check the coolant inthe recovery tank.The level in
the coolant recovery tank should be atHOT
the
mark when the engine is hot or at the COLD mark
when the engine is cold.
5-25
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
It’s unusualfor a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,If a tire goesflat, av6id furthertire and wheel damage
especially if you maintain your tires properly. air
If goes
by driving slowly to level
a place. Turn on your hazard
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. warning flashers.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tirefails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your off
foot
the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well outof the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a
skid and may requirethe same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot
from the
accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by
steering theway you want the vehicle to go.It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you canstill steer. Gently
brake to a stop-- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change aflat tire safely.
5-26
A CAUTION:
Changing a tire cancause an injury. The vehicle
roll overyou or other
can slipoff the jack and
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change yourtire. To help
prevent thevehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
2. Put the shiftlever in PARK (P).
3. n r n off the engine.
To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear
of the
tire farthestaway from the onebeing changed.
That would be the tire on the other of
side
the
vehicle, at the oppositeend.
i
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need
is in the trunk. Pull the
carpeting from the floor
of
the trunk. Turn the center
nut on the compact spare
tire cover tothe left to
remove it. Then lift and
remove the cover.
I
k
the wing nut to the
I Turn
left and remove it. Then
lift
I
off the spacer and remove
the spare tire. See “Compact
Spare Tire” later inthis
section for more information
about the compact spare.
The following steps will tell you how to the
usejack and
change a tire.
i
5-27
Turn the nut holding the jackand wrenchto the left and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.
5-28
The tools you’ll be using includethe jack (A),
socket (B) and wheel wrench(C).
b
I
If there is a wheel cover, loosen
the nut caps withthe
wheel wrench. They won’t comeoff. Then, using the
flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along the edge
of the
wheel cover untilit comes off. Be careful; the edge
may be sharp. Don’ttry to remove the cover with your
bare hands.
To remove a center cap, use the wrench to pry gently at
the notch. Don’t use a tool that is narrower than the
wrench to pry atthis notch.
If your vehiclehas wheel nut caps, remove them using
the wheel wrench.
5-29
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle to the right to raise the
jack lift
head a few inches.
5-30
3. Position the jack under
the vehicle and raise the
jack lift head untilit fits
firmly into the notch in
the vehicle’s frame
nearest theflat tire.
FRONT
VEHICLE
-
REAR EDGE OF FRONT
WHEEL OPENING
Front
The pictures shown directly above display
the
vehicle’s front notch location and the vehicle’s rear
notch location respectively.
FRONT
OF
VEHICLE
L
/I
FRONT EDGEOF
REAR WHEEL
OPENING
Rear
Put the compact sparetire near you.
5-31
I
I
1
Getting under avehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you
could be badlyinjured orkilled. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
A CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage thevehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the properlocation before raising the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicleby turning the jack handle to the
right. Raise the vehicle
far enough off the groundfor
the spare tire to
fit under the vehicle.
5. Remove all wheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire.
5-32
I
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
A CAUTION:
Rust or dirton the wheel,or on theparts to which
it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become
loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and
cause an accident. When you changea wheel,
remove anyrust or dirtfrom the places where the
wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but
be sure touse a scraperor wire brush later,if you
need to, to get all the
rust or dirtoff.
Never use oilor grease onstuds or nuts. If you
do, thenuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-33
7. Replace the wheel nuts
with the rounded endof
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
8. Lower the vehicleby turning the jack handle tothe
left. Lowerthe jack completely.
5-34
9. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
NOTICE:
~
~~
Improperly tightenedwheel nuts canlead to
brake pulsation and rotor
damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper
sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
10. Don’t try to put a wheel cover onyour compact
spare tire. It won’tfit. Store the wheel cover in
the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired
or replaced.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened
wheel nuts cancause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead toan accident.
Be sure touse the correctwheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure get
to new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon
as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to100 lb-ft
(140 Nom).
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare.
If
you try to puta wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
5-35
Storing the Flat Tire andT 01s
I
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
L
After you’ve put the compact
spare tire on your vehicle,
you’ll need to store the
flat tire in your trunk. Use the
following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.
Put theflat tire in the trunkso the side that facesout
when it is on the vehicleis facing down. Thefull-size
tire will notfit down into the well. Place
it so the front is
in the well and the rear
is out of the well.
Put the bolt through one of the wheel
nut holes, install
the retainer over the bolt, then
install the wing nut. Put
the spacer andnut next to the tirein the well. Store the
cover as far forward as possible.
The compact spareis for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tirewith a full-size tire as soon as you
can. See “Compact Spare”in the Index. See the storage
instructions label to replace your compact spare into
your trunk properly.
When you install the wheel cover on full-size
the
tire,
tighten the nut caps to5 lb-ft (7 N-m).
5-36
Storing the Spare Tire and
Tools
1. Nut
I
1
21
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
2. Cover
3. Wing Nut
4. Spacer
5 . Compact Spare Tire
6. Wrench
7. Nut
8. Retainer
9. Jack
10. Bolt
5-37
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new,
it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly.
It should be60 psi
(420 P a ) .
NOTICE:
When the compactspare is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic carwash with
guide rails.The compact spare can
get caught on
the rails. That can damage thetire and wheel,
of your vehicle.
and maybe other parts
After installingthe compact spareon your vehicle, you
should stop as soon
as possible and make sure your
spare tire is correctly inflated.
The compact spare is
made to perform well at speeds up65tomph
(105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km),
Don’t use your compact spare
on other vehicles.
so you can finish yourtrip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want.
Of course, it’s best And don’t mix your cornpact sparetire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’tfit. Keep your mare
to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you
tire andits wheel together.
can. Your spare will last longer and be
in good shape in
case you needit again.
NOTICE:
Tire chainswon’t fit your compact spare.Using
them can damage your
vehicle and can damage
the chainstoo. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.
5-38
-
.r .
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
NOTICE:
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle
is stuck is
to spin your wheels toofast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
Spinning your wheels can destroy
parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
,dCAUTION:
I
If you let your tires spin
at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,
the transaxleor other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could causean engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels
as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown
on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains”in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel
left and right. That will
clear the area around your
front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transaxle
is in gear. If
that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need
to be towed out.If you do need to be towed out, see
“Towing Your Vehicle”in the Index.
5-39
b
5-40
NOTES
0Section 6
ServiceandAppearanceCare
Here you will find information about care
the of your vehicle.This section begins with service and
fuel information,
and thenit shows how tocheck important fluid and lubricant levels. There
is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted its
to appearance care.
6-2
6-4
6-8
6-12
6-18
6-19
6-22
6-28
6-29
6-32
6-33
6-39
6-47
6-48
6-50
6-50
6-5 1
Service
Fuel
Checking Things Underthe Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning the Built-in Child Restraint
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Child
Restraint Harness
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
6-5 1
6-5 1
6-53
6-53
6-54
6-54
6-54
6-55
6-56
6-56
6-56
6-63
6-64
6-65
6-66
6-66
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and
Wiper Blades
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels (If Equipped)
Cleaning Tires
Finish Damage
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts IdentificationLabel
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Vehicle Dimensions
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
6-1
1-
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy withit. We hope you’ll go to your dealerfor
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine
GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do someof your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper Chevrolet Service Manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle
than
this manual can.To order the proper service manual,
see
“Service and Owner Publications’’ in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
Genuine GM parts have oneof these marks:
do your own service work,
see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle’’in the Index.
Genuine
6-2
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list
the mileage and the date
of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
UTI
I
e
You can beinjured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
0 Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, theproper replacement parts
and tools beforeyou attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
0 Be sure to use theproper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be
easily confused.If you use
the wrong fasteners,parts can later break
or fall off. You could behurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside
of your vehicle can
affect the airflow aroundit. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment
to the outsideof
your vehicle.
6-3
6-4
To provide cleaner air,all gasolines in the United States
are now requiredto contain additives that will help
prevent depositsfrom forming in your engine andfuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything tothe fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, suchas ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available
in your areato
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolines if they comply with
the
specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal partsin your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on drivingin another country outsidethe
United States or Canada,the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline
or any otherfuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by useof improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check onfuel availability, ask an auto club,or
contact a majoroil company that does businessin the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also writeus at the following addressfor
advice. Just tellus where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
6-5
Filling Your Tank
I
. ..
I
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
6-6
While refueling,let the cap hangby the tether below the
fuel fill opening.
To remove the cap,turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring it;
in if you let
go of the cap toosoon, it will spring back to the right.
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
~
something ignitesit, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline canspray outon you if you open the
fuel filler cap too
quickly. This spray can happen
if your tankis nearly full, and
is more likely in
hot weather. Open thefuel filler capslowly and
wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all theway.
~
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soonas possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” inthe Index.
When you put the cap back
on, turn it tothe right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fullyinstall the cap. The diagnostic system
can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to
evaporate intothe atmosphere. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure get
to the right
type. Your dealer canget one for you. If you get
the wrongtype, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicatorlamp to light
and yourfuel tank andemissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp”in
the Index.
6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
I
I
I
Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your
vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
0 Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring thefill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained
until thefilling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-8
Checking ThingsUnder the Hood
r
An electric fan under thehood can start up and
injure you even when the engineis not running.
Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Things that burncan get on hot engineparts and
start a fire. These include liquids like
gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned.Be careful not to drop
or spill
things that will burn ontoa hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood,first
pull the handle located
inside the vehicle near the
parking brake pedal.
Then go to the frontof the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release. Lift the hood.
6-9
When you open the hood on the 3100 (Code M) engine, you’ll see:
ij
I
I
I
A. Engine Coolant Reservoir
€3.Radiator Fill Cap
C. Power SteeringFluid Reservoir
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap
E. Engine Oil Dipstick
6-10
F. AutomaticTransaxle
Fluid Dipstick
G. Brake Fluid Reservoir
H. Air Filter
I. Remote Positive (+)
Battery Terminal
J. WindshieldWasher
Fluid Reservoir
K. Battery (located under
Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir)
When you open the hood on the 3800 (Code K) engine, you’ll see:
A. Engine Coolant Reservoir
B. Radiator Fill Cap
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap
F. AutomaticTransaxle
Fluid Dipstick
G- Brake Fluid ~ ~ s e r v o i r
H. Air Filter
I. RemotePositive (+)
Battery Terminal
J. WindshieldWasher
Fluid Reservoir
K. Battery (located under
Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir)
6-11
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are
on properly. Thenjust pull the hood down and close
it firmly.
Engine Oil
*
I
LOW
OIL
If the LOW OIL light on
the instrument panel comes
on, it means you need to
check your engineoil
level rightaway.
3100 (Code M) Engine
3800 (Code K) Engine
For more information,see “Low OilLevel Light” in the
Index. You should check your engineoil level regularly;
this is an added reminder.
The engine oil dipstick handleis the yellow loop near
the front of the engine.
It’s a good idea to check your engine
oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
drain backinto the oil pan. Ifyou don’t, theoil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
6-12
Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
I
Checking Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean
it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
If the oil is at or below the lower mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one
quart of oil. Butyou must use the
right kind.This part explains whatkind of oil to use. For
crankcasecapacity,see“CapacitiesandSpecifications”
I
Don’t add too muchoil. If your engine hasso
much oil that theoil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
.
3100 (Code M) Engine
3800 (Code K) Engine
6-13
The engine oilfill cap is located towardthe front of the
engine nearthe yellow-looped engine oil dipstick.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommendedfor your vehiclecan be identifiedby
looking for the “Starburst” symbol.This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
If you change your own
oil,
be sure you useoil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
3100 (Code M) Engine
3800 (Code K) Engine
Be sure tofill it enough to putthe level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all way
the
back in when you’re through.
If you have youroil changed for you, be sure theoil put
into your engineis American Petroleum Institute
certified for gasoline engines.
You should also usethe
proper viscosity oilfor your vehicle, asshown in the
following chart:
6-14
I
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL EC------’ 1 AND COLD STARTING, -----I
THE LOWEST
SAL VISCOSITY 6L-b wml FOR THE EXPECTED TCmmrw,ATURE RANGE.
HOT
WEATHER
7
“C
+ 10(
+ 38
+ am
+ 27
+ 60
+ 16
+ 40
c4
+ 20
-7
0
c
7
“F
As shown inthe chart, if you havethe 3100 engine,
SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you
can use S A E 1OW-30 if it’s going tobe 0°F (-18°C)
or above. These numberson an oil container showits
viscosity, or thickness.Do not use other viscosity oils,
such asS A E 20W-50.
- 18
r
‘-30
f
RED
COLD
WEATHER
DONOTUSESAE 2OW-50 OR ANYOTHER
GRADE OIL NOTRECOMMENDED
6-15
I
As shown in the chart,if you nave the 3800 engine,
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR 6ES1 FUEL ECONOMY AND COU) r-rru16, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE Eh. --.J TEMPERATURE RANGE.
u)oK
FOR THIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
n
SAE 1OW-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you
can useSAE 5W-30 if it’s going to be colder than
60°F (16”C) before your nextoil change. When it’s
very cold, you should useSAE 5W-30. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.Do
not use other viscosity oils, such
as S A E 2OW-50.
1 NOTICE:
~
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
SAE 5w-30
.
.
/
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USESAE 2OW-50 OR ANY
OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-16
GM [email protected] oil meets all
the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are inan area wherethe temperature falls below
-20°F (-29”C), consider using eitheran SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an S A E OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
within five seconds. If the CHG OIL SOON light
flashes, the systemis resetting. Turn the key toOFF
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to then start the vehicle.
If the CHG OIL SOONlight
advise if you think something shouldbe added.
comes backon, the system has not reset. Repeat
the procedure.
When to Change EngineOil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle has an OilLife Monitor. This feature
will let you know when to change your
oil and
filter -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and
7,500 miles (12 500 km)since your lastoil change.
Under severe conditions, the indicator may come on
before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your
vehicle more than7,500 miles (12 500 km) or
12 months (whichever occursfirst) without an
oil change.
What toDo with Used Oil
The system won’t detectdust in the oil. So, if you
drive in a dusty area,be sure to change youroil every
3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember to reset
the CHG OIL SOON light when the oil has been
changed. For more information,see “CHG OIL
SOON Light” inthe Index.
Used oil can be a real threat
to the environment.If you
change your ownoil, be sure to drainall free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose
of oil
by puttingit in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodiesof water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If
you have a problem properly disposing
of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
How to Reset theCHG OIL SOON Light
After changing the engine
oil, the system must be reset.
With the ignition key in RUN butthe engine off, fully
push and releasethe accelerator pedal slowly three times
Did you know that used engine
oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy
for your skin and could
even causecancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine
oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings aboutthe use and disposal
of oil products.)
6-17
Air Cleaner
..
Pull out the filter. Be sure to install the air filter
and
install the cover tightly when you are finished.
To check or replace the air filter, remove
the four screws
and pull off the cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine when
to replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index.
6-18
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
Operating the engine with air
the cleaner off can
cause you or others to beburned. Theair cleaner
not only cleans the air,
it stops flameif the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine
backfires, you could beburned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine with
the air cleaner off.
A good time tocheck your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engineoil is changed.
Change both the fluid andfilter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km)if the vehicle is mainly driven underone
or moreof these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32”C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
I NOTICE:
If the air cleaner isoff, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And,
dirt can easily get
into your engine, which
will damage it. Always
have theair cleaner in place when you’re driving.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
0
Uses such as foundin taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any
of these
conditions, thefluid and filter do not require changing.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-19
How to Check
Because this operation can be
a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your Chevrolet dealership
Service Department.
If you doit yourself, be sure to follow
all the
instructions here, oryou could geta false readingon
the dipstick.
NOTICE:
0
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, whichis 180°F to
200°F (82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it's colder than50°F (lO"C), you
may have to drive longer.
Too much or too little fluid can aamage your
Checking the Fluid Level
transaxle. Too much can mean that some
of the
0 Park your vehicle ona level place. Keep the
fluid could come out and fall
on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to engine running.
0 With the parking brake applied, place the shift
get an accurate readingif you check your
lever
in PARK (P).
transaxle fluid.
0
With
lever
three
lever
0
Let the engine run at idle
for three to five minutes.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
0
When outside temperatures are above90 "F (32"C).
6-20
your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
through each gear range, pausing for about
seconds in each range. Then, position shift
the
inPARK (P).
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
3100 (Code M) Engine
3100 (Code M) Engine
3800 (Code K) Engine
The transaxle fluid dipstick handle
is the red loop
near the backof the engine.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
3800 (Code K) Engine
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and readthe
lower level.The fluid levelmust be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid levelis in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way.
2. Push it back in allthe way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-21
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluidlevel as
described under “How to Check.”
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine what
kind of transaxle fluidto use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.
4. When the correct fluid levelis obtained, pushthe
dipstick backin all the way.
Engine Coolant
If the fluid levelis low, add only enough
of the proper
fluid to bring the levelinto the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remainin your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant.
8
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid the
at
dipstick hole to bring
it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Don’t ove$ZZ.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add
coolant
when
it is low. If you
have
problem
a with
engine overheating orif you need to add coolantto your
radiator, see “Engine Overheating” inthe Index.
NOTICE:
I
will:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
[email protected], because fluid with that label
is
madeespecially for yourautomatictransaxle.
Damage-causedbyfluidotherthanDEXRON-111
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
6-22
I
A 50/50 mixture of water and [email protected]
coolant
0
Give freezing protection down to-34°F (-37°C).
0
0
Give boilingprotectionupto 265 “F (129 “C).
Protectagainstrustandcorrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
0
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
What to Use
NOTICE:
When adding coolant,it is important thatyou use
only [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOLis added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosionmay result. I n addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months,
whichever occursfirst. Damage causedby the
use of coolant other than [email protected]
is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Use a mixtureof one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and [email protected] coolant which
won’t damage aluminumparts. If you use this mixture,
you don’t needto add anythingelse.
--
Adding only plain water to your
cooling system
can be dangerous. Plainwater, or some other
liquid likealcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’scoolant
coolant
warning systemis set for the proper
mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture,
your engine couldget too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning.Your engine could
catch fire andyou or otherscould be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
[email protected]
6-23
NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you usean improper coolant mixture, your
engme could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn't be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator,
heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than
four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
1
If you use theproper coolant,you don't have to
add extra inhibitors or additiveswhichclaimto
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-24
I
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be
at theCOLD mark ora little higher. When your engine
is warm, thelevelshouldbe up to the HOT mark or a
little higher.
LOW
COOLANT
If this light comes on, it
means you’re low on
engine coolant.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, addthe proper [email protected]
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill
it.
If the coolant recovery tankis completely empty, add
coolant tothe radiator. (See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.)
A CAUTION:
Thrning the radiator pressure cap
when the
engine and radiator are hot can
allow steam and
scalding liquids toblow out andburn you badly.
With thecoolant recoverytank, you will almost
never have to add coolant
at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure capeven a
little when the engine and radiator arehot.
--
--
’A
CAUTION:
-
-
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
1
6-25
IRadiator Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
NOTICE:
Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
m e n you replace your radiator pressure cap, AC'
an
cap is recommended.
3100 (CodeM) Engine
3800 (CodeK) Engine
Thermostat
I
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostatWhen to Check Power Steering Fluid
in the engine coolant system.
The thermostat stops the
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
fluid unless you suspect there
is a leakin the system or
reaches a preset temperature.
you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have
the system inspected
When you replace your thermostat, an AC' thermostat
and repaired.
is recommended.
6-26
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
For the 3800 engine, the
level should be at theHOT
mark when the engine
compartment is hot.If the
fluid is at the ADD mark,
you should addfluid.
When the engine compartment is cool, wipethe cap and
the topof the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean
rag. Replace the cap and
completely tightenit. Then removethe cap again and
look at thefluid level on the dipstick.
For the 3100 engine, when
the engine compartmentis
hot, the level should be at
the H mark. When it’scold,
the level should beat the
C mark. If the fluid is at
the ADD mark, you
should addfluid.
What to Use
To determine what kindof fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
6-27
Windshield Washer Fluid
What toUse
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If you will be
operating your vehicle in
an area wherethe temperature
may fall below freezing, usea fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap labeled WASHER
FLUID ONLY. Add
washer fluid until the tank
is full.
NOTICE:
0
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer
fluid tank and
other partsof the washersystem. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washerfluid.
Fill your washer fluid tankonly
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs.
which could damage the tankif it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze)in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washersystem and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
leaking outof the brake system. If itis, you should
have your brake system fixed, since
a leak means that
sooner orlater your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to“top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings.
You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work
is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why
the brake fluidlevel in
the reservoir mightgo down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down toan acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings
are put in, the fluid
level goesback up. The other reason is that fluid is
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine
is hot enough.You or others could be burned,
Add brake
and your vehicle could be damaged.
fluid only when workis done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to
a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
6-29
What toAdd
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid -- such as Delco [email protected](GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brakefluid from a sealed
container only.
NOTICE:
0
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it.This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
0
With the wrong kind
of fluid in your brake
system, your brakesmay not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always usethe proper brakefluid.
6-30
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. Forexample, just afew
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brakesystem candamage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care’’ in
the Index.
Some driving conditionsor climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are
first applied or lightly
Your vehicle hasfront disc brakes and rear drum brakes applied. This does not mean something
is wrong with
if it is equipped withthe 3 100 engine. It has four-wheel
your brakes.
disc brakes if it is equipped withthe 3800 engine.
Properly torqued wheel nutsare necessary to help
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
prevent brake pulsation. When tiresare rotated, inspect
make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
brake padsfor wear and evenly torque wheel nuts
in
pads areworn and new pads are needed.The sound
the proper sequence to
GM specifications.
may come andgo or be heardall the time your vehicle
If you have rear drum brakes, they don’t have wear
is moving (except when youare pushing on the brake
indicators, butif you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
pedal firmly).
noise, havethe rear brake linings inspected immediately.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each timethe tires are removed for rotation or
‘3N:
changing. When you have the
front brake pads replaced,
have the rear brakes inspected, too.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
Brake linings should always be replaced
as complete
to
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead
axle
sets.
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
See “Brake System Inspection”
in Section 7 of this
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
Brake Wear
1 NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Pedal Travel
Battery
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, orif there is a rapid increasein pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every new Chevrolet hasan ACDelco [email protected] battery.
You never have to add water to one of these. When it’s
time for a new battery, we recommend an ACDelco
Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement number
shown on the original battery’s label.
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust
for wear.
Vehicle Storage
Replacing Brake System Parts
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more,
remove the black, negative(-) cable from the battery.This
will help keep your battery from running down.
The braking system on a modern vehicle
is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicleis to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
down and you have to have new ones put-- in
be sure
that can explode. You can be badly hurt
if you
you get new approvedGM replacement parts. If you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change-- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
other ways if someone putsin the wrong replacement
for longer storage periods.
brake parts.
Also, for your audio system,see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-32
Bulb Replacement
In this section you’ll find directions
for changing the
bulbs in someof the lampson your vehicle.See
“Replacement Bulbs’’in the Index to find the type
of bulb you need to use.
A
Halogen Bdbs
1 a CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by
raising the lock tab and pulling
the connector away
from the bulb’s base.
Headlamps
4. Install the electrical connector to the bulb.
1. Open the hood.
5 . Install the new bulb by inserting the smallest tab
on the bulb base into the matching notchthe
in
retaining ring. Turnthe bulb a quarter-turn tothe
right until it stops.
2. Press and turn the bulb a quarter-turn
(to the left for
the driver’s side; to the right for the passenger’s side)
and remove it from the retaining ring by gently
pulling it back and awayfrom the headlamp.
6. Close the hood.
6-33
Front Parking and TurnSignal Lamp
.
2. Open the flap by lifting the tab.
1. Open the hood. There isone flap on each side of
the radiator.
6-34
I
I
......,
^
,
I
3. Position the radiator air side baffle aside and
remove the two fasteners. Remove the snap screw
from the fascia.
4. Slide the headlamp assembly inboard to release the
mounting tabs and gently pull the inside
of the
assembly awayfrom the vehicle.
5. Push the tabon the bulb socketand turn it to theleft.
Pull the socketout of the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling
it out.
Do not twist the bulb.
7. Push in the new bulb.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to replace the assembly.
6-35
5. To remove a socket, pressthe tab, turn the socket to
the left and pullit out.
6. Pull the bulb out. Do not twist it.
Back-up Lamp
1. Open the trunk.The back-up lamp bulbs are in the
rear of the trunk lid.
7. Push the new bulb into the socket.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Replace the socket in the assembly.
1
Tighten the socket by turning it to the right.
I
2. Press the tab on the
socket,turn the socketto
the left and pull it out.
Install the assembly and the two lower wing nuts.
Replace the carpeting.
Replace the upper (convenience net) wing nut,
if equipped.
13. Replace the convenience net, if equipped.
d6
3. To remove the bulb, pull it outof the socket. Do not
twist the bulb.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to replace the socket.
.
6-37
i
Dome Lamp
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Grasp the front and rear centerof the dome lamp
cover at the same time. Then squeeze and pull
downward. (To help pry the sides loose,a flat-blade
screwdriver may be usedas an aid duringthis
procedure.)
2. Remove the old bulbfiorn the small prongs
extending from the dome lampbase plate; hook the
new bulb onto the prongs.
3, To replace the bulb cover, center
it over the base
plate, makingsure both the cover and the base plate
line up properly. Snap the cover firmlyinto place.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed
in this
section, contactyour dealer service department.
Replacement bladesfor your vehicle are22 inches
(56 cm) in length.
1. Turn on the wipers tothe low wipe setting.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the
outer positionsof the wiperpattern. The blades are
more accessiblefor removalheplacement while in
this position.
6-38
I
3. Full the windshield wiper arm away from
the windshield.
4. While holding the wiperarm away from the
glass, pushthe release clip from under the blade
connecting point and pull
the blade assembly down
toward the glass to remove it from the wiper arm.
5 . Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiperarm
until you hearthe release clip “click” into place.
For wiper blade replacement length and type, also
see
“Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see
your Chevrolet Warranty bookletfor details.
A CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
0 Overloading yourtires can cause
overheating as a resultof too much friction.
You could havean air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
0 Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all
tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tiresare cold.
0 Overinflated tiresare more likely to be
cut, puncturedor broken by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
0 Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your
tread is badly worn,or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
--
6-39
~
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, whichis on the
inside of the trunk lid shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold”
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three
hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell
you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right.
It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can
get thefollowing:
0 Too much flexing
0 Too much heat
0 Tire overloading
Bad wear
0 Bad handling
0 Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
~~~
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires havetoo much air (overinflation),
you can get thefollowing:
0 Unusualwear
0 Bad handling
0 Roughride
0 Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 Wa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage
to check tire
pressure. You can’t tellif your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-40 I
_
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel
Replacement” later in this section for more information.
The purposeof regular rotation isto achieve more
uniform wear for all tires onthe vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important.
See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services”in the Indexfor scheduled
rotation intervals.
Don’t include the compact spare tire
in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust
the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire-Loading Information label. Make certain
that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See
“Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the parts towhich
it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change awheel, remove
any rust or dirt from
places where thewheel
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be
sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt
off. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in theIndex.)
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
6-41
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a newtire if any of the following statements
are true:
0
0
0
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture,cut or other damage that
can’t be repairedwell because of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size
of tires you need, look
at the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when
it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have
an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed
by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
You can see the indicatorsat three or more places
around thetire.
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the samesize,
tire’s rubber.
load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias,
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep bias-be1ted
or radial) as your ofigind tires.
enough to show cordor fabric.
6-42
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Mixing tires could cause
you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly,and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizesmay also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be
sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developedfor use on your vehicle.
The following information relates to
the system
developed bythe United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires
by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold
in the United
States.) The grades are molded on the sidewallsof most
passenger car tires.The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saveror temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diametersof 10 to 12 inches (25 to30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they mustalso conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
If you use bias-plytires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks
after
many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-43
Treadwear
The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based on
the wear rateof the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
--
Traction A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
A, B,
and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavementas measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based
on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
--
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The gradeC corresponds to a levelof
performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature gradefor this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately
or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment andTire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully atthe factory to give youthe longest tirelife
and best overall performance.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you needto replace anyof your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wearor
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your
your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the alignment Chevrolet model.
may need to be reset.If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that
is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.the
If
wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your
dealer if anyof these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You could have a
collision in which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts for replacement.
6-45
NOTICE:
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometeror
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and
tire or tire
chain clearance to the body
and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more
information.
TJsed Replacement W: els
Putting aused wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or
how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
and causean accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.
I
I
1
If your vehicle hasP225/60Rl6size tires, don’t
use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there’s not enough clearance.
Use another type of traction device onlyif its
manufacturer recommendsit for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’scontacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin yourwheels.
NOTICE: (Continued)
Never use these toclean your vehicle:
NOTICE: (Continued)
If you do findtraction devices that will fit,install
them on thefront tires.
If you have other tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class
“S” type chainsthat are the propersize for your
tires. Install them on thefront tires and tighten
them as tightlyas possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions.If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues,
slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast
or spinning thewheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst
into flame if you strike a
match or get them ona hot partof the vehicle. Someare
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anythingfrom a container to clean your
vehicle, besure to followthe manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors
or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
CarbonTetrachloride
Acetone
PaintThinner
Turpentine
LacquerThinner
0
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous-- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use anyof these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
LaundrySoap
Bleach
ReducingAgents
6-47
~~~
~~~
~~
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often get
to rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot Soil
and
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well.
You can get
GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” the
in Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
0
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0
Clean up stains as soon as you -canbefore they set.
0
Carefully scrapeoff any excess stain.
0
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush
may be usedif
stains are stubborn.
0
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean entire
the
area immediatelyor it will set.
6-48
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brushthe area to removeany loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container labelto form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’t rubit roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleanedthe section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth andlet dry.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Fabric Protection
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet that has been
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and treated with Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a3M
blood can be removedas follows:
product. It protects fabricsby repelling oil and water,
which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and
soiled area with cool water.
carpet often to keep
it looking new.
2. If a stain remains, followthe multi-purpose interior
Further information on cleaning
is available by calling
cleaner instructions described earlier.
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
Cleaning Vinyl
treat the area with awaterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
of lukewarm water.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to removedirt. You
4.Letdry.
may have to doit more than once.
Stains causedby candy, ice cream, mayonnaise,chili
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
if you don't get themoff quickly. Use a clean
cloth and a vinyVleather cleaner.
See your dealer
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
for this product.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry
completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
6-49
Cleaning Leather
Cleaning the Built-in Child Restraint
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap Your
or
built-in child restraint may be cleaned with mild
saddle soap and wipe dry withsoft
a cloth. Then,let the
soap and lukewarm water. Don’t use household cleaners.
leather dry naturally.Do not use heat to dry.
They may weaken the harness or damage plastic parts.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
The built-in child restraint pad
is attached to the child
dealer for this product.
restraint cushion and seatback with fastener strips.
You
can remove the pad, machine wash
it in cold water on a
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
dry it on a low heat setting.
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. gentle cycle and tumble
Never bleach or iron the pad, and don’t
dry clean it.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work intothe
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in
finish, it can harmthe leather.
Child Restraint Harness
Cleaning the Topof the Instrument Panel
Keep the safety belts and the built-in child restraint
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces harness clean anddry.
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections
in the windshield
and even makeit difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts or the built-in
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
child restraint harness.
If you do, they may be
Use only a mild soap and water solution on
softa
severely weakened. In a crash, they might not be
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
able to provide adequate protection. Clean the
surface finish.
safety belts and the child restraint harness only
with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in
Part No. 1050427)or a liquid household glass cleaner
full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
will remove normal tobacco smoke and
dust films on
rinse the blade with water.
interior glass.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
Don’t use abrasive cleanerson glass, because they may
replace blades that look worn.
cause scratches. Avoid placing decalson the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped
off later. If
Weatherstrips
abrasive cleaners are used
on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Silicone greaseon weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak. Apply
Any temporary license should not be attached across
the
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
defogger grid.
six months. During very cold, damp weather
more frequent application may be required. (See
Cleaning the Outside of the
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.)
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, orif the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap or other material may be
on theblade or windshield.
Clean the outside ofthe windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, [email protected] (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM
Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse
it with water.
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it cleanby washing it often with lukewarmor
cold water.
6-51
Don’t wash your vehiclein the direct raysof the sun.
Don’t use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dishor car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid
or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to
dry on the surface, or they could stain.
Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel
to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning ExteriorLampsLenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, soft
a cloth and a liquid
hand, dishor car washing (mild detergent) soap to clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.’’
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or
mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue
from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
6-52
Your vehicle has a “basecoatlclearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and madefor a basecoatlclearcoat
paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on
a basecoallclearcoat paint finish may
dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials suchas calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, roadoil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish
if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soonas possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep
the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you
could damagethe surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes.
These
brushes can also damage
the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care
to wipeoff any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage
the paint finish.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure
the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the
parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
6-53
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fracturesor deep scratches in the finish Some weather and atmospheric conditions
can create
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon
quickly and may develop
into a major repair expense.
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle.
This
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-updamage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
materials available from your dealeror other service
into the paint surface.
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals usedfor ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor panand
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials
from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed
in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer oran underbody car washing system can
do
this for you.
6-54
Although no defectin the paint job causes this,
Chevrolet will repair, at no charge the
to owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
of purchase, whichever occurs first.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
PART NUMBER USAGE
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
994954
Polishing Cloth- Wax Treated 23 in. x 25 in. Exterior polishing cloth
1050172 Removes oz.
tar, (0.473
road oilL)and amhalt Tar and Road Oil Remover 16
1050173
16 oz. (0.473 L) I Chrome Cleaner and Polish I Useonchrome,stainlesssteel,nickel,copperandbrass
1050174
16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
oz. (0.946 L)
Vinyl Cleaner 32
I 1050214
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Glass Cleaner 23
oz. (0.680 L)
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleans and lightly waxes Wash Wax Concentrate
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
1052918""
8 OZ. (0.237 L)
ArmorAll"Protectant
vinvl and rubber
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
1052925
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner
and floor mats
02. (0.473 L)
Spray on and rinse with water Wheel Cleaner 16
1052929
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Dry Spot Remover
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils Capture
12345002
oz. (0.473 L)
" Cleaner 16
Cleans and shines a varietyof surface types Armor All
2.5 sq. ft. 12345721
Shines vehicle without scratching Synthetic Chamois
12345725
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Spray on tire shine Silicone Tire Shine
Finish Enhancer
16 oz. (0.473 L) 12377964
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
12377966
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Wax
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish Cleaner
12377984
oz. (0.473 L)
Surface Cleaner 16
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
** Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See "Fluids and Lubricants" in the Index.
F
-I
I
I
I
I
-
I
I
4
a *
I
6-55
VehicleIdentificationNumber (VIN)
0
themodeldesignation,
paint information and
0
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label
is not removed fromthe vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the
NOTICE:
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
labels and the certificates
of title and registration.
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
Engine Identification
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
The 8th character in your VIN
is the engine code.This
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
as
can keep other components from working
and replacement parts.
they should.
I
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside
of your trunk lid. It’s
very helpful if youever need to order parts. On this
label is:
Your vehicle hasan air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electricalto your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected
by a circuit breakerin
the underhood electrical center. An electrical overload
will causethe lamps to go on andoff, or insome cases
to remainoff. If this happens, have your headlamp
system checked right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combinationof fuses, circuit
breakers, and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself.
This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by
electrical problems.
Windshield Wipers
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a badfuse with a newone of the identical size
and rating.
I ne
windshield wiper motor is protected
by a circuit
breaker and afuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by someelectrical problem, have
it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the
fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem
is fixed.
6-57
Instrument Pmel Fuse Block
Some fuses are in a fuse
block on the passenger’s
side of the instrument panel.
Pull off the cover labeled
FUSES to expse the fases.
r
L
Circuit
Breaker
A
6-58
Description
Not Used
B
Not Used
C
Power Windows
D
Power Seats
E
Not Used
Fuse
Rating Description
1
Cigar Lighter-- Instrument Panel and
Console Cigar Lighters
2
Not Used
3
Not Used
4
HVAC -- HVAC Control Assembly
Solenoid Box, Mix Motor, DRL Module,
HVAC Control Head, Defogger Relay,
(S.E.O.) Digital Speedometer
Fuse
12
Anti-Theft/PCM -- Theft-Deterrent
Module, Powertrain Control Module,
(PCM) IGN Syst. Relay
13
A B S -- Electronic Brake Control Module
(EBCM), ABS Relay
14
HVAC Blower Motor -- Blower Motor
Relay
15
L.H. Spot Lamp (S.E.O.)
16
Steering Wheel Control#1 -- Steering
Wheel Radio Control Lighting
17
Not Used
18
Not Used
19
Power Accessory#1 -- Door Lock
Switches, Trunk Courtesy Lamp, O/S
Mirror Switch, (S.E.O.) Emergency
Vehicle-Rear Compartment Lid Lamp or
Window Panel Lamps
Steering Wheel Control#2 -- Steering
Wheel Radio Controls
Air Bag -- Air Bag System
5
Hazard Flasher
6
R.H. Spot Lamp (S.E.O.)
7
Starter Relay
8
Not Used
9
Not Used
10
I/P Electronics Battery-- Chime
Module, Electronic Brake Control
Module (EBCM), Theft-Deterrent
Module, Radio DLC
20
Power Accessory#2 -- Sunroof Control
Unit, (S.E.O.) Accessory Feed
21
11
Rating Description
6-59
Fuse
Rating Description
Fuse
Rating
Description
Cruise Control -- Cruise Control Cut-Out
Switch, Cruise Control Module, Turn
Signal Cruise Control Switches
35
Not Used
36
Not Used
23
Stoplamps -- Stoplamp Switch (Brake)
37
Rear Defog -- Rear Window Defogger
Switch Relay
24
Not Used
38
Radio -- Radio, Power Drop
25
EnglishMetric (S.E.O.)
39
26
Not Used
27
Not Used
28
CTSY Lamps-- Vanity Mirrors, I/P
Compartment Lamp,US Lighted
Rearview Mirror, Dome Lamp
40
I/P Electronics Ignition Feed-Headlamp Switch, Instrument Cluster,
Chime Module, Keyless Entry Receiver,
Stoplamp switch (TCC and BTSI)
(S.E.O.) Accessory Switch
Not Used
22
29
Wiper -- Wiper Switch
41
Power Drop
30
Turn Signal -- Turn Signal Flasher
42
Evap. Sol. -- Evaporation Emissions
(EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve
31
Not Used
43
Not Used
32
Power Locks -- Door Lock Relay,
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver
DRL MDL -- Daytime Running Lamp
Module, (S.E.O.) Accessory Switch
44
Not Used
45
Not Used
33
34
6-60
Not Used
--
Underhood Electrical Center Passenger’s Side
Some fuses arein the underhood electrical center onthe
passenger’s side of the engine compartment.
rn
uuu
R/CMPT REL PCM BAT
Fuse
nnr-
Description
WCMPT REL Remote Trunk Release, Back-up
Lamps, Remote ControlDoor
Lock Receiver
PCM BAT
Powertrain Control Module (PCM),
Fuel Pump Relay,Fan Cont #1 and
#2 Relay
A/c CONT
A/C CMPR Relay
TRANS
Automatic Transaxle
6-61
~
Fuse
Description
F/INJN
Fuel Injectors
PCM IGN
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Heated Oxygen Sensor#1 and #2
Evaporative Emissions(EVAP)
Canister Purge SolenoidValve
ELEK IGN
Electronic Ignition (EI) Control
Module
10
I/P Fuse Block
12
Passenger's Side Underhood
Electrical Center,IGN SYST Relay,
WCMPT REL Fuse, PCMBAT Fuse
13
FAN CONT #1 Relay
Relay
Description
14
FUEL PUMP
15
AIC CMPR
16
FAN CONT #2 -- Secondary
Cooling Fan (Passenger's Side)
FAN CONT #1-- Primary Cooling
Fan (Driver's Side)
IGN SYST
17
18
--
Underhood Electrical Center Driver's Side
6-62
I
I
Fuse
Description
12
HD LPS -- Circuit Breaker to
Headlamp Switch
13
ABS -- ABS Relay
Relay
Description
14
ABS -- Anti-Lock Brake System
15
FAN #3 -- Secondary CoolingFan
(Passenger’s Side)
16
HORN
Replacement Bulbs
Fuse
FAN #3
PARK LPS
HORN
ABS
11
NumberBulb Lamps
Exterior
Back-up .........................
3156 or 3057
FAN #3Relay
Center High-Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891T2
Front Parking/Tum Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3357NA
Headlamp Switch
Headlamp,High-Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Horn Relay
Headlamp, Low-Beam ....................
9006
Anti-Lock Brake System
Stop/Tail/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Circuit BreakerC, StarterNumber
Relay,STR
Bulb Lamps
Interior
WHL Control # 2, Power Accessory
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10230955
#2, and Theft Deterrent Relay
*For service informationon these bulbs, contact your
dealer service department.
Description
6-63
Capacities and Specifications
Please referto “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Indexfor more information.
4T60E:
Automatic lkansaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement ..... 7 quarts (6.7 L)
After Complete Overhaul........ 9.6 quarts (9.2 L)
4T65E:
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement ..... 7.4 quarts (7 L)
After Complete Overhaul......... 10 quarts (9.5 L)
When draining/replacing converter; more
fluid will
be needed.
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3100 (Code M) ...............11.6 quarts (10.9 L)
3800 (Code K) ............... 11.7 quarts (1 1 .O L)
6-64
Refrigerant (R-l34a),
Air Conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.88 lbs. (0.85 kg)
Engine Crankcase Oil and Filter Change
3100 (Code M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
3800 (Code K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Length ......................
22 inches (56 cm)
Type ..................................
hook
Fuel Tank
3 100 (Code M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6 gallons (62.8 L)
3800 (Code K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6 gallons (62.8 L)
*See “Air Conditioning Refrigerants later in
this section.
-
”
Note: All capacities are approximate. When adding,
be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended
in this manual. See“RecommendedFluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Engine Specifications
3100 (Code M)
3800 (Code K)
Type .......................................
V6 ..............................
V6
Displacement ..............................
191 CID ..........................
231 CID
Compression Ratio ...........................
9.6:l ............................
9.25: 1
Firing Order .............................
1-2-3-4-5-6 ......................
1-6-5-4-3-2
Thermostat Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195OF (9 1O C) .....................
195°F (91OC)
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 6 0 0 5 2 0 0 .......................
[email protected]
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Filter
All Engines...........................
A 1208C
Battery
3100 (Code M) .......................
600 CCA
3800 (Code K) .......................
690 CCA
Engine Oil Filter
3100(CodeM) ..........................
PF47
3800(CodeK) ..........................
PF47
PCV Valve
3 100 (Code M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV892C
Radiator Cap
All Engines .............................
RC27
Spark Plugs
3100 (CodeM) ................. AC ‘Qpe 41-940
Gap: 0.060” (1.52mm)
3800 (Code K) ................. AC Type 41-921
Gap: 0.060” (1.52mm)
6-65
Vehicle Dimensions
Wheelbase .............. 107.5 inches (273.0 cm)
Tread Width (Front) ........ 59.5 inches (1 1.2
5 cm)
Tread Width (Rear) ........ 59.1 inches (150.0 cm)
Length ................. 200.9 inches (510'4 cm)
Width ................... 72.5 inches (184.1 cm)
Height ................... 54.8 inches (1 39.2 cm)
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerantsare the same.
If the air conditioning systemin your vehicle needs
If
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
you're not sure,ask your dealer.
6-66
I
I
I-ys Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section coversthe maintenance requiredfor your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain
its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-14
7- 14
Introduction
Your Vehicle andthe Environment
How This Section is Organized
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Using Your MaintenanceSchedule
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
At Each FuelFill
At Least Once a Month
At Least Twice a Year
At Least Once a Year
Part C:PeriodicMaintenanceInspections
7-17
7-17Steering,SuspensionandFrontDriveAxle
Boot andSeal Inspection
7- 17ExhaustSystemInspection
7- 17
EngineCoolingSystemInspection
7- 17
Throttle SystemInspection
7- 17
BrakeSystemInspection
7-18
Part D: RecommendedFluidsandLubricants
7-20
Part E: MaintenanceRecord
7-1
Introduction
IMPORTANT:
Your Vehicle and the Environment
~
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE A!
RECOMMENDED
1
Protection
Plan
I
I
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the qualityof the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions fromyour vehicle. To help protect our
environment, andto keep your vehiclein good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty andOwner Assistance booklet, or your
Chevrolet dealer for details.
7-2
-
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this sectionis divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”
shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex,so unless you are technically
qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service departmentor another qualified
service centerdo these jobs.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance
work only if you have
the requiredknow-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have
a qualified
technician dothe work.
“Part B: Owner Checksand Services” tells you what
should be checked and when.
It also explains what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle
in good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service department
or another qualified service center should
perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants’’ lists
some recommended products to help keep your vehicle
properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you
do the work
yourself or haveit done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a placefor
you to recordthe maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenanceis performed, be
sure to writeit down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should
be done.
In addition,it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed
to qualify your vehiclefor
warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enoughto do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications”
in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help
you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. Butwe don’t know exactly
how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances
only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances
all the timein very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries.Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands orin many other ways.
This part tells youthe maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.
If you
go to your dealerfor your service needs, you’ll
know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed
in Part D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these.
All
parts should be replaced andall necessary repairs done
before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
This scheduleis for vehicles that:
0
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label.See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.You may even need
more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section.
So please read this
0 are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
section and note how you drive.
If you have any
driving limits.
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
0 use the recommended fuel.See “Fuel” in the Index.
condition, see your dealer.
7-4
Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in this schedule
up to 100,000 miles
(1 66000 km)should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)at the same intervals.The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240000 km) should be performedat
the same interval after150,000 miles (240000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
* Your vehicle
has an Engine Oil
Life Monitor. This
monitor will show you when
to change the engineoil
and filter -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and
7,500 miles (12500 Ism) since yourlast oil change.
Under severe conditions,the indicator may come on
before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle
more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months
without an oil and filter change.
Footnotes
The system won’t detect dust in the oil.
So if you drive
in
a
dusty
area,
be
sure
to
change
your
oil
and filter
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or
the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner ifthe CHG OIL
Oil
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify SOON light comes on. Remember to reset the Life
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the Monitor when the oil has been changed. For more
information, see “CHG OIL SOON Light” in the Index.
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
+ A good time to check your brakes
is during tire
performed at the indicated intervals and
the maintenance
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
be recorded.
Maintenance Inspections” in Part
C of this schedule.
7-5
Maintenance Schedule
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
DATE
I
I DATE
I
Check Oil Life Monitor. If engineoil and filter are changed, reset monitor.See
“Engine Oil”in the Index.
An Emission ControlService. (See footnote*.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
CI Check OilLife Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.See
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission ControlService. (See footnote*.)
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replacefilter
if necessary.
An Emission ControlService. (See footnote“f)
0 Rotate tires.See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation patternand additional information. (See footnote+.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See
MILEAGE
DATE
I
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
7-6
1
I
I
Maintenance Schedule
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
DATE
0 Check OilLife Monitor. If engineoil and filter are changed, reset monitor.See
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See
footnote +.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
I7 Inspect fuel tank, cap andlines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
~~
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engineoil and filter are changed, resetmon.itor.See
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See
footnote +.)
I DATE
I SERVICEDBY: I
1
, ’
Maintenance.Schedule
1
45,000 Miles (75000 km)
0 Check OilLife Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.See
“Engine Oil“in the Index.
An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote*.)
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter
. if
necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnotet.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
1
.
1%
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
”;- In heavy city t&ic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90°F
(32O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as foundin taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you do not useyour vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and
filter donot require changing.
~
f i l
MILEAGE
I
MaintenanceSchedule
I
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
0 Check OilLife Monitor. If engine oi1 and filter are changed, reset monitor.See
“Engine Oil” inthe Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
I DATE
~
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I DATE
0 Check OilLife Monitor. If engineoil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See
Oil”
Index.
“Engine
in the
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in
the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0 Inspect engine accessorydrive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
CI Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
Inspect fuel tank, cap and linesfor damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace partsas needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
MILEAGE
I
SERVICED BY:
d
SERVICED BY:
7-9
1
MaintenanceSchedule
I
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission ControlService. (See footnote*.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
MILEAGE
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and
filter are changed, reset monitor. See
“Engine Oil” inthe Index.
An Emission ControlService. (See footnote*.)
0 Inspect air cleanerfilter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission ControlService. (See footnote“f)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” the
in Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
MILEAGE
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See
“Engine Oil”in the Index.
An Emission ControlService. (See footnote*.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
7-10
MILEAGE
I
Maintenance Schedule
I
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
Oil”
0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.See
“Engine
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap andlines for damage or leaks. Inspectfuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replaceparts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See
footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
0 Check OilLife Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See
DATE
I
MILEAGE
DATE
I
“Engine Oil”in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See
footnote +.)
7-11
Maintenance Schedule
I
100,000 Miles (I66 000 km)
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transaxlefluid and filter if the vehicleis mainly driven
under one or moreof these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as foundin taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, thefluid and
filter donot require changing.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
-
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush andrefill cooling system (or every60 months since last service,
whicheveroccurs first). See “EngineCoolant” in theIndex for whattouse.
MILEAGE
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Sewice.
7-12
I
SERVICED BY:
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed beloware owner checks and services which
should be performed at
the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add [email protected]
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairsare completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricantsare added to your
vehicle, make sure theyare the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each FuelFill
It is importantfor you or a service station attendant to
per$orm these underhood checks at eachfuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil”in the Indexfor
further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washerfluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add
the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid”in the Index
for further details.
At Least Oncea Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tiresare inflated to the correct pressures. See
“Tires” inthe Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play.See “Audio Systems”in the
Index for further details.
7-13
At Least ’Ltrice a Year
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; addif needed. See
“Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.A fluid loss may
indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
Restraint System Check
Make surethe safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
At Least Once a Year
working properly. If your vehicle has a built-in child
restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps,
latch plates, buckle, clip, retractors and anchorages are Key Lock Cylinders Service
working properly. Lookfor any other loose or damaged Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
safety belt and built-in child restraint system parts.
If
specified in PartD.
you see anything that might keep a safety belt or built-in
Body Lubrication Service
child restraint systemfrom doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn
or frayed safety beltsor harness
Lubricate all hinges and latches, including those
for the
straps replaced.
hood, rear compartment, glove box door and the console
door. PartD tells you what to use. More frequent
Also lookfor any opened or broken air bag coverings,
lubrication may be required when exposed to a
and have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system
corrosive environment.
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper bladesfor wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areasof the windshield. Alsosee “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
7-14
Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
Starter Switch Check
’A
I
CAUTION:
I
When youare doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the stepsbelow.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and
the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turnoff the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear.The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
CAUTION:
.I
When youare doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be readyto apply the regular brake
immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off,turn the key to theRUN position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move theshift lever outof PARK (P) with
normal effort.If the shift lever moves out of
PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service.
7-15
I
IgnitionTransaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake t
set,
ry to turn
the ignition key to LOCK
in each shift lever position.
0
The key shouldturn to LOCK only when theshift
lever isin PARK (P).
0
The key should come out onlyin LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transaxle PARK (P)
Mechanism Check
r
I /I\ CA-TION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and propertycould be damaged. Make
sure thereis room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
7-16
Park on a fairly steephill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your€oot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
0
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle
in NEUTR4L (N),
slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is. held the
by parking
brake only.
To check the P m (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the enginerunning, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring,use plain water toflush any
corrosive materialsfrom the underbody. Take care to
dean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into
the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be
performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring
and fall). You should let your dealer’s service department
or other qualified service centerdo these jobs. Make sure
any necessary repairs are completedat once.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Proper procedures to perform these services may
be found
in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings
and clamps; replaceas needed. Clean the outside of the
radiator and air conditioning condenser.To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and
pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
Throttle System Inspection
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, and fo
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace
Boot and Seal Inspection
any components that have high effort or excessive wear.
Inspect the fi-ont and rear suspension and steering system Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.
for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack
of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses
Brake System Inspection
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses
Clean and then inspectthe drive axle boot seals for
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafiig, etc.
damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.
Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and
Exhaust System Inspection
drums, wheel
cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
the exhaust system.Look for broken, damaged, missing or brake adjustment.You may need to have your brakes
out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose
inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions
connections or other conditions which could cause a heat result in frequent braking.
7-17
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
USAGE
IrzuIDILUBRICANT
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM [email protected]@
or ~ a v O l b t [email protected]
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant”in
the Index.
NOTE: muids and lubricants identified below
by name,
part number or specification may be obtainedfrom
your dealer.
IUSAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol uf the proper viscosity.TO
determine the preferred viscosity
far your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil“in the Index.
7-18
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
System
equivalent DOT-3Brake Fluid).
@
Power Steering
System
GM Power SteeringFluid (GM
Part NO. 1052884 - 1pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Automatic
Transaxle
[email protected]
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM [email protected] Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)or
equivalent.
I USAGE
I
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
[email protected] Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-PuoseLubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
7-19
I
II
,Part E: Maintenance Record
II
After the scheduled services are performed, izeortl the
date, odometer reading and who performed
the service
in the boxes provided afterthe maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following record pages.Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts.Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
I
1
I
7-20
I
Maintenance Record
7-21
~~
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-22
ODOMETER
SERVICED
READING
BY
MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
7-23
Maintenance Record
I
DATE
I
ODOMETER
RJUDING
I
SERVICED BY
I
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
0Section 8
CustomerAssistanceInformation
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance.
This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistancefor Text Telephone
(TTY)Users
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participationin an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
8- 10
8-10
8-11
8-11
8-1 1
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to
Ordering Service and Owner
in Canada
the United
the
General Motors
Publications
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Chevrolet dealers havethe facilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date infomtion to promptly address m y
concerns you may have. However, if a concern hasnot
been resolved toyour complete satisfaction,take the
following steps:
STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management.Nomdly, concerns can
be quickly resolved at thatlevel. E the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service of parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
-
A
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contactinga memDer or
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outsideof the United States and Canada,call
the following numbers as appropriate:
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish)
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
0
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-1315
In other overseas locations, callGM Overseas
Distribution Corporationin Canada at:
(905) 644-4112.
8-3
For prompt assistance, please have
the following
information available togive the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information bookletfor addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
e Your name, address, home and business
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved the
in dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
That iswhy we suggest you followStep One firstif
you have a concern.
e
e
e
e
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This
is available
from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at
the top leftof the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle deliverydate and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage youto call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, writeto:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-4
Customer Assistancefor Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard
of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs),
Chevrolet hasTTY equipment available atits Customer
Assistance Center. AnyTTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance Program
Roadside Assistanceis available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved overthe phone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide networkof dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membershipis free, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels
of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy" Care:
0
Toll-free number, 1- 800-CHEV-USA
0
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,
wrecker services,locksmithkey service, glass
repair, etc.)
To enhance Chevrolet's strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevroletis excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the ownerof a 1998 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistanceis free.
8-5
I
1
ROADSIDE Courtesy” Care PROVIDES:
0 Roadside Basic Care services (asoutlined previously)
Plus:
0
0
FREE Non-Wmanty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed onthe road)
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offersCourtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation
will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided
by
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited
Wmmty
to eligible purchasersof 1998 Chevrolet passenger car
and light duty trucks. (Please seeyour selling dealer
for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 1998 and newer Chevrdet vehicles
for a periodof 3 years/36,000 miles(60 000 km),
whichever occurs first.All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside
or dealer
Service Management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not partof or
included in the coverage providedby the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinueBasic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
8-6
I
For complete program details,
see your Chevrolet dealer
to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
Please refer tothe Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio
for full
program details.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When Canadian Roadside Assistance
roadside servicesare required, our advisors will explain
Vehicles purchasedin Canada have an extensive
any payment obligations that may be incurred
for
Roadside Assistance program accessible
from anywhere
utilizing outside services.
in Canada or the United States. Please refer
to the
For prompt assistance when
calling, please havethe
separate brochure providedby the dealer orcall
following available to give to
the advisor:
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
0 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
0
License plate number
0
Vehicle color
0
Vehicle location
0
Telephone number whereyou can be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
0
8-7
Chevrolet Courtesy Transportationis not part of the
Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation
for customers
Chevrolet reservesthe right to make any changes or
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
be offeredin conjunction withthe coverage provided by
without notification.
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For additional program details, contact your
to retail purchasersof 1998 Chevrolet passenger cars
Chevrolet dealer.
and light duty trucks (please
see your selling dealer
Some state insurance regulations make
it impractical to
for details).
rent vehicles to people under 21 years
of age. If youare
Courtesy Transportation includes:
under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet
One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
will reimburse up to $3O/day
for documented
completed duringthe same day.
transportation you receive.
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days,
OR
Coverage period inthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation maybe available under the
0 Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
transportation allowance in lieu of rentalfor any
dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is
overnight warranty repair up five
to days, OR
available only in the United
States and Canada.
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e.,fiend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of
In Canada, please consult yourGM dealer for
rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days. information on Courtesy Transportation.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by your Chevrolet dealer
service management. Claim amounts should
reflect all actual costs.
Courtesy Transportation
8-8
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all 50 states andthe District
of Columbia. Canadian ownersrefer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet
for
information onthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reservesthe right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue
its
participation in this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are comrnitted
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that,
if a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlierin this section is very successful.
There may be instances where
an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program
is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following
the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number,or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statementof the natureof your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilizethe Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to
AUTO LINE, but you
may contact the BBBat any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving
as an intermediary.If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduled whereeligible customers may present their
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may
accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be
bound by that decision.The entire dispute resolution
procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days
from the
time youfile a claim until a decision is made.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, andif it finds that a safety defect exists in
a groupof vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
Some state laws may require you to use this program
or
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration programin individual problems between you, your dealer
General Motors.
or in the courts. For further information, contact
the
BBB at 1-800-955-5100 orthe Chevrolet Customer
To contact NHTSA, you mayeither call the Auto Safety
Assistance Centerat 1-800-222- 1020.
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited.You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, OntarioK1G 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA
(or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222- 1020 or write:
In Canada, please callus at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service
literature are availablefor purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number
for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
8-11
b%
8-14
NOTES
0 Section 9
Index
Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your Vehicle . . . . . 6-3
AirBag .......................................
1-20
1-23
How Does it Restrain ..........................
1-22
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Readiness Light .........................
1.21.2.52
1-25
Servicing ...................................
1-23
What Makes it Inflate ..........................
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-23
When Should it Inflate .........................
Air Bag System ................................
1-20
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
3-4
Airconditioning ................................
6-66
Air Conditioning Refrigerants .....................
6-45
Alignment and Balance. Tire ......................
6-53
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ......................
AM-FMStereo .................................
3-6
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape
Player and Automatic Tone Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc
Player and Automatic Tone Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 13
Antenna. Fixed Mast ............................
3-22
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Active Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55.4.9
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54.4.7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
.............................. 3-17
Anti.Theft.Radio
Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
8-9
Arbitration Program ..............................
2-40
Armrest.Storage ...............................
2-41
Ashtrays ......................................
Audio Equipment. Adding ........................
3-20
3-19
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ....................
Audio. Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-20
Audio System. Tips .............................
3-6
Audio Systems ..................................
2-28
Auto-Down Window ............................
Automatic
2-20
Overdrive (@) ...............................
Transaxle Check ..............................
7-14
6-19
Transaxle Fluid ...............................
Transaxle Operation ...........................
2-18
Auxiliary Power Connection ......................
2-44
Back-up Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6-32
Battery .......................................
5-3
Jump Starting .................................
Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Saver ......................................
2-39
Warnings ................................
5.3. 5.5
BBB Auto Line .................................
8-9
9-1
Better Business Bureau Mediation................... 8-9
Blizzard ...................................... 4-26
Brake
Adjustment ..................................
6-32
Fluid .......................................6-29
Master Cylinder .............................. 6-29
2-22
Parking .....................................
PedalTravel ................................. 6-32
Replacing System Parts ........................6-32
System Warning Light .........................
2-53
Trailer ......................................
4-33
Transaxle Shift Interlock .......................2-26
Transaxle Shift Interlock Check.................. 7-15
6-31
Wear .......................................
Brakes.Anti -Lock ...............................
4-7
Braking ........................................ 4-6
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Break-In.NewVehicle ..........................
2-12
Brightness Control .............................. 2-37
BTSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
7-15
BTSI Check ...................................
1-35
Built-in Child Restraint ..........................
Bulb Replacement .............................. 6-33
Canadian Roadside Assistance ....................
8-7
6-64
Capacities and Specifications ......................
CarbonMonoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.2.27.4.27. 4.33
Cassette Deck Service ...........................
7-13
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 11
Cassette Tape Player Care........................ 3-21
Cellular Telephone ..............................
2-45
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement . . . . 6-36
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Certification Label ..............................
4-29
Chains.Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Chains.Tire ................................... 6-46
5-26
Changing a Flat Tire.............................
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Checking Your Restraint Systems .................. 1-64
Chemical Paint Spotting..........................6-54
CHG OIL SOON Light ................. 2-60.6-17. 7-5
6-17
How to Reset ................................
Child Restraints ......................
1-33.1-34. 1-48
Built-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position
........... 1-55
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position
.......... 1-57
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position
.......... 1-59
Top Strap ...................................
1-54
WheretoPut ................................ 1-53
2-41
CigaretteLighter ...............................
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
6-57
Cleaner. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Cleaning ......................................
6-47
6-53
Aluminum Wheels ............................
6-50
Built-in Child Restraint ........................
Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48
FabricProtection .............................
6-49
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51
Inside of Your Vehicle .........................
6-48
Instrumentpanel ............................. 6-50
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Outside of Your Vehicle ........................
6-51
Special Problems .............................
6-49
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6-53
Tires .......................................
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 1
Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Climate Control System ...........................
3-2
Clock. for Systems with Automatic
3-6'
Tone Control. Setting the ........................
Clock. for Systems without Automatic
Tone Control. Setting the ........................
3-6
3-1
Comfort Controls ................................
3-22
Compact Disc Care .............................
Compact Disc Player ............................
3-15
3-22
Compact Disc Player Care ........................
3- 15
Compact Disc Player Errors.......................
5-38
Compact Spare Tire .............................
Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
4-5
Control of a Vehicle ..............................
Convenience Net ...............................
2-4 1
2-40
Convex Outside Mirror ..........................
6-22
Coolant .......................................
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
BleedV'ves .................................
5-23
6-24
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater.Engine ...............................
2-17
Radiator ....................................
5-22
RecoveryTank ............................... 5-19
Whattouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
4-36
WhenTrailerTowing ..........................
5-17
CoolingSystem ................................
2-37
Courtesy Lamps ................................
Courtesy Transportation ...........................
8-8
2-32
CruiseControl .................................
2-40. 2-41
Cupholders ...............................
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ....................
8-2
Damage. Finish ...............................
Damage. Sheet Metal ............................
Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defects.ReportingSafety ........................
Defensive Driving ...............................
Defogger.RearWindow ..........................
Defogging .....................................
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions.Vehicle ............................
Dolby B Noise Reduction ........................
Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement ....................
DoorLocks .....................................
Drive Position. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Position .................................
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Foreign Countries ...........................
In the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
6-53
2-36
5-3
8-10
4-2
3-5
3-5
3-5
6-66
3-12
6-38
2-4
2-20
1-11
4-19
4-2
4-2
4-20
4-26
6-5
4-16
9-3
Driving (Continued)
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
4-10
OnCurves ..................................
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-22
On Hill and Mountain Roads ....................
On Snow or Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 18
WetRoads ..................................
4-16
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . 2.15. 2.16.3.20. 6.56
6.10.6.11
Engine
Coolant .....................................
6-22
2-17
Coolant Heater ...............................
CoolantLevelCheck ..........................
7-13
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Coolant Temperature Light .....................
2-55
2-27
Exhaust .....................................
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
OilLevelCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Overheating ................................. 5-14
2-27
Running While Parked .........................
6-65
Specifications ................................
Starting Your ........................... 2.14.2.15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
6-12
Engineoil ....................................
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Additives ................................... 6-17
Checking ...................................
6-13
9-4
I
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
What Kind to Use .............................6-14
When to Change ..............................
6-17
Ethanol ........................................ 6-5
2-27
Exhaust, Engine ................................
Fabric Cleaning ............................... 6-48
Fabric Protection ............................... 6-49
2-1
FeaturesandControls ............................
FillingYourTank ................................
6-6
Filter. Air ..................................... 6-18
Filter. Engine Oil ............................... 6-17
6-52
Finishcare ....................................
Finish Damage ................................. 6-54
First Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Flashers. Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-26
Flat Tire. Changing .............................
FloorMats .................................... 2-43
Fluids and Lubricants ............................ 7-18
Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Four-Way Manual Front Seat ...................... 1-3..
FrenchLanguageManual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Front Parking Bulb Replacement................... 6-34
FrontTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Fuel .......................................... 6-4
Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4.6-5
FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Gage .......................................
2-61
In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
I
en
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
2-56
Fuel .......................................
2-61
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle................ 2- 18
GloveBox ....................................
2-40
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-29..
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................
Guide
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
GVWR .......................................
4-29
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Hazard Warning Flashers ..........................
5-2
Head Restraints .................................
1-6
Headlamps .................................... 2-36
Bulb Replacement ............................
6-33
2-31
High/Low Beam Changer ......................
OnReminder ................................
2-36
Wiring .....................................
6-57
HearingDamage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Heating ........................................
3-4
High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 1
4-21
Highway Hypnosis ..............................
HillandMountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Hitches, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Release ......................................
6-9
2-29
Horn .........................................
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 18
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check ....................
7-16
Illumination. Sustained Interior ....................
2-37
6-40
Inflation. Tire ..................................
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror ................. 2-39
Inspections ....................................
7-17
Brakesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
ExhaustSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Front Drive Axle Boot .........................
7-17
Front Drive Axle Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-17
Radiator and Heater Hose ......................
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-17
Throttle System ..............................
2-46
Instrumentpanel ...............................
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Cleaning .................................... 6-50
2-48,2-49
Cluster ................................
FuseBlock .................................. 6-58
2-37
Interior Lamps .................................
Jack.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28.5.30.5.31.5.32.5.34
Jumpstarting ...................................
5-3
K e y Lock Cylinders Service .....................
7-14
Key Reminder Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Keys ..........................................
2-2
Labels
Door ........................................
2-4
Certification .................................4-29
Key Lock Cylinder Service .....................
7-14
Service Parts Identification .....................
6-56
2-4
PowerDoor ..................................
Tire-Loading Information ...................... 4-28
Rear-Door Child Security .......................
2-5
Vehicle Identification Number ................... 6-56
Trunk .......................................
2-9
Lamps
Window .................................... 2-29
2-37
Courtesv ....................................
4-13
LossofControl ................................
Low Coolant Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56, 6-25
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Low Oil Level Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60, 6-12
Interior .....................................
2-37
Lubricants and Fluids ............................
7-18
2-36
OnReminder ................................
Leaving Your Vehicle .............................
2-5
7-14
Lubrication Service, Body ........................
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-25
Lighter ....................................... 2-41
parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Maintenance. ~ o r m aReplacement
l
Lights
Maintenance
Record
............................
7-20
Air Bag Readiness .......................
1.21.2.52
Maintenance Schedule ........................
7.17.
.5
Anti-Lkk Brake System Active ............. 2.55.4.9
.....................
7-13
Owner
Checks
and
Services
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54.4.7
Periodic
Maintenance
Inspections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-17
2-53
Brake System Warning .........................
Recommended
Fluids
and
Lubricants
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-18
Charging System .............................
2-52
Scheduled Maintenance Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
ChgOilSoon ................................
2-60
6-54
Maintenance.
Underbody .........................
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
2-55
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Interior .....................................
2-37
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ......................
2-56
2-56, 6-25
Low Coolant Warning ....................
2-39
Manual Outside Mirrors ..........................
Low Oil Level Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60, 6-12
6-5
Methanol ......................................
Oilwarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
2-39
Mirrors .......................................
1-6, 2-51
Safety Belt Reminder ......................
Convex Outside ..............................
2-40
Security ....................................
2-61
Inside
Daymight
Rearview
.....................
2-39
2-56
Service Engine Soon ..........................
Loading Your Vehicle ...........................
4-28
Manualoutside ..............................
2-39
2-39
Power Outside ...............................
Locks ......................................... 2-4
2-42
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14Visorvanity .................................
6-4
MMT .........................................
_.
.
4
.
I
Mountain Roads ................................
4-22
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
N e t . Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Neutral. Automatic Transaxle .....................
2- 19
2-12
New Vehicle “Break-In” .........................
Night Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Odometer ....................................
2-50
Odometer. Trip .................................
2-50
4- 12
Off-Road Recovery .............................
Oil. Engine .................................... 6-12
Oil Life Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17. 7-5
Oil Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
OnstarSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
(@)Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . 5-14
Overheating Engine .............................5- 14
8- 12
Owner Publications. Ordering .....................
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
Park
Automatic Transaxle ..........................
2- 18
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Shifting Out of ...............................
2-26
Parking
AtNight ....................................
2-10
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P)
Mechanism Check ........................... 7-16
Lots .......................................
2-10
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
WithaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Parking On Hills. Leaving ........................
4-36
Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Passing . . & . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
PASS-Key 11 ................................. 2-11
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Power
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
OptionFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
OutsideMirrors .............................. 2-39
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
6-26
Steering Fluid ................................
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
1-19
Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts ....................
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
3-19
Radio Reception ................................
3-6
Radios ........................................
4-16
Rain, Driving In ................................
Rain, Other Tips ................................
4-18
2-38
ReadingLamps ................................
Rear
Door Child Security Locks ......................
2-5
Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Safety Belt Comfort Guides .....................
1-30
Seatpassengers ..............................
1-27
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
9-7
Rearview Mirror. InsideDaymight ................. 2-39
Reclining Front Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Recovery Tank. Coolant ..........................
5-19
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning ....................
6-66
Remote
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Trunk Release ................................. 2-9
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Replacement
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
Parts .......................................6-65
Wheel ...................................... 6-45
Replacing Safety Belts ........................... 1-65
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 8-10
Restraints
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Child
6-50
Restraint Harness ............................
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33.1-34. 1-48
Cleaning the Built-in Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Head ........................................ 1-6
Replacing Parts After a Crash ................... 1-65
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
2- 19
Reverse. Automatic Transaxle .....................
Right Front Passenger Position ....................
1-20
Roadside Assistance .............................. 8-5
Roadside Assistance. Canadian ..................... 8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Rotation. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
.
kl
t
9-8
safety Belts ...................................
1-6
Adults ......................................
1-11
Center Passenger Position ......................
1-26
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.11
1-64
Extender ....................................
How to Wear Properly ......................... 1.11
IncorrectUsage ....................
1.15.1.62.1.63
LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12.1.28
1-61
LargerChildren ..............................
1-10
Questions and Answers ........................
1-30
Rear Comfort Guides ..........................
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Rear Seat Passengers ..........................
1-27
ReminderLight ......................... 1-6 , 2.5 1
Replacing After a Crash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65
Right Front Passenger Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-33
Smaller Children and Babies ....................
1.19
Use During Pregnancy .........................
Why They Work ............................... 1-7
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
vi
Safety Warnings and Symbols .......................
Seatback. Reclining Front .........................
1-4
Seats
ManualFour-WayFront ........................
1-3
Manual Two-way Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Power .......................................
1-4
Restraint Systems ..............................
1-1
SeatControls .................................
1-2
Securing a Child Restraint ......................
1-48
Second Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-61
SecurityLight ..................................
Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Service ........................................
6-2
8- 12
Bulletins. Ordering ............................
Engine Soon Light ............................
2-56
Manuals. Ordering ............................ 8- 12
Parts Identification Label .......................
6-56
Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 12
Publications. Ordering in Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 11
Work. Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service and Owner Publications ................... 8- 12
Service Publications .............................
8- 12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ........... 1-25
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
ShiftLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Shifting
2- 18
Automatic Transaxle ..........................
Into Park (P) .................................
2-23
OutofPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
SignalingTurns ................................
2-30
Skidding ......................................
4-14
Sound Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Spare Tire.
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the
SpareTire .................................
5-30
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Specifications. Engine ...........................
6-65
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance ............... 8-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48
7-15
Starter Switch Check ............................
Starting Your Engine .......................
2- 14. 2- 15
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.15. 5-16
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
In Emergencies ...............................
4-11
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
2-29
Wheel. Tilt ..................................
2-40
Storage Compartments ...........................
6-32
Storage. Vehicle ................................
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow .................. 5-39
SunVisors .................................... 2-42
2-45
Sunroof .......................................
...
Symbols.Vehicle ................................
vu1
Remote Keyless Entry ..........................
2-8
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Taillamp Bulb Replacement .......................
6-36
TapePlayerCare ............................... 3-21
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..........................
3-17
THEFTLOCK ................................ 3-17
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
TiltSteeringWheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
3-6
Time. Setting the ................................
Tire Chains ....................................
6-46
TM
9-9
rading
1
TireLoading ...................................
4-28
Trailer
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Backingup .................................
4-34
Tires .........................................6-39
4-33
Brakes ......................................
6-45
Alignment and Balance ........................
Driving on Grades
6-42
BuyingNew .................................
Drivingwith .................................
4-34
4-34
FollowingDistance ...........................
; 6-46
Chains ....................................
5-26
Changing a Flat ..............................
4-33
Hitches .....................................
6-53
Cleaning ....................................
Maintenance When Towing .....................
4-36
5-38
Compact Spare ...............................
4-35
MakingTurns ................................
6-40
Inflation ....................................
ParkingonHills ..............................
4-36
Inflation Check ............................... 7- 13
Passing .....................................
4-34
Safety Chains ................................
4-33
Inspection and Rotation ........................
6-41
Loading ....................................
4-28
Tongueweight ............................... 4-32
6-40
Pressure ....................................
Total Weight on Tires ..........................
4-33
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
4-30
Towing .....................................
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
4-35
Turnsignals .................................
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ................. 5-37
4-31
Weight .....................................
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44
Automatic ...................................
6-19
Traction ....................................
6-44Transmitters, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Transportation,Courtesy ..........................
8-8
I
Treadwear ...................................
6-44
Before
Leaving
...............................
4-21
Quality Uniform
.......................
I
6-46
2-50
Used Replacement Wheels ......................
Trip Odometer .................................
Wear Indicators ..............................
6-42
TrUnk
6-45
Wheel Replacement ...........................
Lock ........................................
2-9
When It's Time for New .......................
6-42
Release, Remote ...............................
2-9
1-51
TopStrap .....................................
8-4
TTYUsers .....................................
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
2-25
TorqueLock ...................................
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Torque, Wheel Nut ..............................
5-35
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
4-30
TowingaTrailer ................................
5-8
Towing Your Vehicle .............................
.
.
Underbody Flushing Service .....................
7- 16
UnderbodyMaintenance .........................
6-54
Underhood Electrical Center ................. 6.60. 6.62
Vehicle
4-5
Control ......................................
Damage Warnings .............................. vii
Dimensions ................................. 6-66
IdentificationNumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-56
Loading ....................................4-28
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii
Ventilation System ...............................
3-4
Visor Vanity Mirrors ............................
2-42
Visors. Sun ....................................
2-42
w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators ............... 2-51
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 1
Weatherstrips ..................................
6-51
Wheel
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
Nut Torque ..................................
5-35
Replacement .................................6-45
Wrench .....................................
5-29
Window Lock Out .............................. 2-29
Windows .....................................
2-28
Auto-Down .................................
2-28
Power ......................................
2-28
WindshieldWasher .............................
2-32
Fluid ..................................
2.32. 6.28
Fluid Level Check ............................
7-13
Windshield Wipers ..............................
2-31
BladeReplacement ...........................
6-38
Fuses ......................................
6-57
Winter Driving ................................. 4-24
Wiper Blade Check ............................. 7-14
Wiring.Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
WreckerTowing ................................. 5-8
Wrench. Wheel .................................
5-29
Y o u r Driving and the Road
.......................
4-1
9=11
0 Service Station Checkpoints
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
P5-19 AND P6-25
/
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
FLUID
REMOTE
BATTERY P6-28
I
I
\
HOOD
REMOTE
TRUNK
RELEASE
F4-Y
P6-9
--
A
\
FUEL
DOOR
P6-6
TERMINAL
P5-4
For detailed information, refer
to the page number listed,or see the Index in the back
of the owner’s manual.
9-12
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement